HD11 Service Manual

Transcription

HD11 Service Manual

HD11
Service Manual
4535 612 10261 Rev A February 2005
CSIP Level 1
Copyright © 2005 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
All rights reserved
About This Manual
Audience
This document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips Medical
Systems (“Philips”) personnel, Philips licensed representatives, and Philips customers who have
purchased a valid service agreement for use by the customer’s designated in-house service
employee on equipment located at the customer’s designated site. Use of this document by
unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. This document must be returned to Philips when the
user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips’ first written request.
This manual supports the field service maintenance and repair of the HD11 Ultrasound System.
The user of this document is a qualified ultrasound electronics technician who has completed
training classes on the system and its peripherals.
Manual Format
This manual is in Portable Document Format (PDF), for viewing on a laptop computer with
Acrobat Reader. A list of bookmarks functions as an additional table of contents. Those bookmarks, the table of contents, and cross-references use hypertext links to provide access to the
referenced information.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Conventions in
This Manual
Service Manual
Questions or
Comments
Customer
Assistance
HD11 Service Manual
Page 2
About This Manual
The following conventions are used in this manual:
•
Hypertext links are blue.
•
All procedures are numbered, and all subprocedures are lettered. You must complete steps
in the sequence they are presented to ensure reliable results.
•
Bulleted lists indicate general information about a function or procedure. They do not imply
a sequential procedure.
•
Control names and menu items or titles are spelled as they are on the system, and they
appear in bold text.
•
Symbols appear as they appear on the system.
•
An English system is assumed.
If you have questions about the service manual, or you discover an error in the manual, contact
Philips Ultrasound Technical Publications:
•
bothell.techpubs@philips.com
•
Technical Communications, MS 964, at the address below
Various support locations around the world can provide customers technical assistance with the
ultrasound system. Customers should contact the representative or sales office from which they
purchased the system or the nearest Philips Ultrasound office.
Philips Ultrasound
22100 Bothell-Everett Highway
Bothell, WA 98021-8431
USA
425-487-7000 or 800-426-2670
www.medical.philips.com
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 3
About This Manual
“EnVisor,” “Color Power Angio,” “Cineloop,” “HD11,” “OmniPlane,” “QLAB,” “SonoCT,” “Ultraband,” and “XRES” are trademarks of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
Non-Philips Ultrasound product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (“Philips”)
and may not be reproduced, copied in whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the prior
written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use of this document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved
for current Philips personnel and Philips customers who have a current and valid license from Philips for use by the customer’s
designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the customer’s designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Legal Department. This document must
be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips’ first written request.
PHILIPS PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, Philips assumes no liability for errors or omissions and
reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein to improve reliability, function, or design. Philips
may make improvements or changes in the products or programs described in this document at any time.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 4
Contents
Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Manual Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Conventions in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Service Manual Questions or Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
More About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 1-1 HD11 Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Modalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 5
Contents
Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
System Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 1-2 HD11 Ultrasound System Control Panel and Soft Key Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
E-box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
System Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Device Safety Requirements and Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 1-3 System Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Supplies and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
System PC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 2-1 PC Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Monitor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 6
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
About Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
General Operating Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Avoiding EMI and RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
General Equipment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
About Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Physical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
System Operating Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 4-1 Power Supply Output Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
E-box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 7
Contents
System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
I/O Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Token Ring Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
System Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 4-1 HD11 System Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Inspecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking Physical Access for Delivery and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking Electrical and Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Gathering Site Network (DICOM) Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Uncrating and Unpacking the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Inspecting the Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Uncrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
➤ To inspect the system after uncrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Assembling the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Installing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Installing the Printers and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Installing the System Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 8
Contents
Powering On and Configuring the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting Up the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Verifying the User Interface Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
➤ To check or set the user interface language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 5-1 Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 5-2 Regional and Languages Options Window (Regional Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 5-3 Regional and Languages Options Window (Languages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Verifying the Input Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
➤ To check or set the input language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 5-4 Text Services and Input Languages Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Verifying the System Language Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
➤ To check or set the system language unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 5-5 Regional and Languages Options Window (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting the Institution Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
➤ To check or set the institution name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 5-6 Border and Prompts Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
➤ To set the system date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 5-7 Date and Time Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Verifying the System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
➤ To verify or enable system software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 9
Contents
Figure 5-8 Setup Window (Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 5-9 System Options View/Install/Remove Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring the DICOM Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
➤ To set or change DICOM parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring Other System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
➤ To configure other system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Preparing the Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
➤ To configure the system for PAL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Checking System Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Presenting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Physical Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 5-10 Installation Procedure List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Uncrating the HD11 Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 5-11 Cutting the Plastic Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
➤ To uncrate the HD11 Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 5-12 Removing the Corrugated Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 5-13 Removing the Foam Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 5-14 Removing One of the Corrugated Wraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 5-15 Removing the Second Corrugated Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 5-16 Removing the Hold-down Brace Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 5-17 Removing the Ramp Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 10
Contents
Figure 5-18 Placing the Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 5-19 Removing the System Hold-down Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 5-20 Removing the Wheel Chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 5-21 Rolling the System Off the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 5-22 Removing the Cable Connection Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
➤ To install the system monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 5-23 Attaching the Monitor to the Monitor Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 5-24 Connecting the Monitor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 5-25 Replacing the Cable Connection Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Single Peripheral (Color Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 5-26 Color Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
➤ To install the color printer (as a single peripheral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Single Peripheral (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 5-27 VCR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
➤ To install the VCR (as a single peripheral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Dual Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 5-28 Removing the Top Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
➤ To install dual top-mounted peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 5-29 Installing the Peripheral Mounting Plate Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 5-30 Installing the Dual Mounting Plate Power Cord Hanger Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 11
Contents
Figure 5-31 Installing the Strapping on the Dual Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 5-32 Installing the Dual Peripheral Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 5-33 Installing the Dual Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 5-34 Installing the Peripheral Covers (Garages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
System Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 5-35 Connecting the System Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
➤ To install the system power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Test and Inspection Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 6-1 HD11 System Test and Inspection Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 6-2 When to Perform Tests—Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 6-3 When to Perform Tests—Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chassis to Ground Resistance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 6-1 Chassis to Ground Resistance Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
➤ To test the system for resistance between chassis and ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Ground Wire Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 6-2 Ground Wire Leakage Current Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
➤ To test the system’s ground wiring for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ECG Lead Leakage Current Test (Source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 12
Contents
Figure 6-3 ECG Lead Leakage Current Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
➤ To test ECG lead leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ECG Lead Isolation Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 6-4 ECG Lead Isolation Leakage Current Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
➤ To test ECG lead isolation leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Transducer Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 6-5 Transducer Leakage Current Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
➤ To test transducer leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 6-6 Transducer Isolation Leakage Current Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
➤ To test transducer isolation leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
IBM-Hitachi Drive Fitness Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
➤ Creating a DFT Bootable CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
➤ Using the Drive Fitness Test to Test PC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Adjusting the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Adjusting the Monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
➤ To set the monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adjusting the Monitor Signal Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
➤ To verify the monitor signal input voltage setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 13
Contents
Figure 7-1 Monitor OSD Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 7-2 Monitor OSD Advanced Controls Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adjusting VGA Vertical Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
➤ To adjust the VGA vertical size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 7-3 Monitor OSD Size & Position Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Checking System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Checking the System Electrical and Mechanical Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Exterior and Interior Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
➤ To clean the trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Exterior Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
All Troubleshooting Starts Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 9-1 Effective Problem-Solving Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Clarifying Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Re-creating a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 14
Contents
Isolating Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Developing a Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Implementing a Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Verifying Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Returning the System to Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Known Symptoms, Causes, and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Table 9-2 Previously Experienced Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Incompatible Hardware Shutdown Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Passwords Don’t Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Checking for EMI and RFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
System Hangs or Crashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
F-key Alternates on Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Backing Up and Restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
➤ To create a backup CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 9-1 Settings Window (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 9-2 Backup Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
➤ To record the network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
➤ To restore custom presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 9-3 Restore Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
➤ To restore the network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 15
Contents
Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 10-1 Disassembly Procedure List (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 10-2 Disassembly Procedure List (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
System Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 10-3 Removing the Left Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
➤ To remove the system enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 10-4 Removing the Right Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 10-5 Removing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 10-6 Removing the Top Cover with a Top Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 10-7 Removing the Side and Rear Base Skirts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 10-8 Removing the Video Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
➤ To remove the system monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 10-9 Removing the Control Panel Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
➤ To remove the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 10-10 Removing the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Soft Key Panel and Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 16
Contents
Figure 10-11 Removing the Control Panel Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
➤ To remove the soft key panel and system speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 10-12 Sliding the Control Panel Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 10-13 Removing the Lower Soft Key Panel Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 10-14 Removing the Cable Connection Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 10-15 Removing the Video Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 10-16 Removing the Upper Soft Key Panel Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 10-17 Removing the Soft Key Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 10-18 Removing the Soft Key Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 10-19 Removing the System Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
VCR or Color Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 10-20 Unstrapping the VCR or Color Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
➤ To remove the VCR, the color printer, or both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Peripheral Mounting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 10-21 Removing the Dual or Single Peripheral Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
➤ To remove the peripheral mounting plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
B&W Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 10-22 Removing the Top Cover with a Mounting Plate Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
➤ To remove the B&W printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 10-23 Disconnecting the Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 10-24 Removing the PC Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 17
Contents
Figure 10-25 Removing the OEM Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 10-26 Removing the B&W Printer from the OEM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 10-27 Removing the Left Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
➤ To remove the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 10-28 Disconnecting the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
PC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 10-29 Disconnecting the PC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
➤ To remove the PC assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 10-30 Locating the PC Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 10-31 Removing the PC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
PC Interface Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
➤ To remove the PC interface boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 10-33 Removing the PC Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 10-34 Disconnecting the PC Rear Panel Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 10-35 Disconnecting the Internal PC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 10-36 Removing the PC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 10-37 Removing the E-box Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
➤ To remove the E-box Interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 10-38 Removing the Graphics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 18
Contents
➤ To remove the Graphics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 10-39 Graphics Board in Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 10-40 Graphics Board Connector and Locking Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
E-box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 10-41 Locating the E-box Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
➤ To remove the E-box assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 10-42 Removing the E-box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
E-box Card Cage Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 10-43 Removing the Right Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
➤ To remove the E-box boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 10-44 Disconnecting the Token Ring Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 10-45 Removing the E-box Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 10-46 Removing the E-box Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Signal Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 10-47 Removing the Signal Distribution Board and Backplane Board Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
➤ To remove the Signal Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 10-49 Removing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 10-50 Removing the Transducer Connector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 10-51 Removing the Signal Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 19
Contents
Figure 10-52 Removing the Signal Distribution and Backplane Board Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
➤ To remove the Backplane board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 10-53 Removing the Vertical Card Cage Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 10-54 Removing the Lower Card Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 10-55 Removing the Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 10-56 Removing the Right Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
➤ To remove the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 10-57 Disconnecting the Token Ring Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 10-58 Removing the E-box Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 10-59 Disconnecting the Power Cord Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 10-60 Removing the Power Supply Retaining Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 10-61 Removing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Rear I/O Assembly and Video I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 10-62 Removing the Left and Right Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 10-63 Disconnecting the Rear Vent and Rear I/O Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 10-64 Removing the Rear Vent and Faceplate Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 10-65 Removing the Rear I/O Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 10-66 Removing the Video I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Lift Column Gas Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 10-67 Raising the Control Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 20
Contents
➤ To remove the lift column gas strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 10-68 Rotating and Supporting the Control Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 10-69 Opening the Metal Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 10-70 Removing the Gas Strut from the Ball Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 10-71 Removing the Gas Strut from the Lock Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 10-72 Installing the Gas Strut into the Lock Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 10-73 Inserting the Gas Strut onto the Ball Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fan Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 10-74 Disconnecting the Fan Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
➤ To remove the fan assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 10-75 Unhooking the Fan Power Cable from the Cable Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 10-76 Removing the Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fan Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 10-77 Removing the Fan Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
➤ To remove the fan air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
System Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 10-78 Preparing the System for Caster Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
➤ To remove a system caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 10-79 Removing a System Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Crating the HD11 Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 10-80 Removing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 21
Contents
➤ To crate the HD11 Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 10-81 Rotating the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 10-82 Installing the Control Panel Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 10-83 Supporting the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 10-84 Covering the System with an Antistatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 10-85 Preparing the Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 10-86 Locking the Swivel-Lock Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 10-87 Loading the System onto the Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 10-88 Rotating the Rear Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 10-89 Placing the Wheel Chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 10-90 Preparing the System Hold-down Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 10-91 Installing the System Hold-down Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 10-92 Placing the Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 10-93 Installing the Ramp Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 10-94 Installing the Hold-down Brace Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 10-95 Placing the First Corrugated Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 10-96 Placing the Second Corrugated Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 10-97 Taping the Seams on the Corrugated Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 10-98 Placing the Monitor Mount Top Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 10-99 Placing the Corrugated Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 10-100 Banding the System Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 22
Contents
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
System Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
System Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 11-1 HD11 Ultrasound System Signal Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 11-2 HD11 Ultrasound System Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 11-3 HD11 PC Internal Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Cable Table Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Cable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 11-1 HD11 System Signal Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 11-2 HD11 System Power Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Peripheral Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 11-4 HS-MD3000U/E Mitsubishi VCR Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 11-5 UP-D895MD Sony Digital B&W Printer Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 11-6 UP-D23MD Sony Digital Color Printer Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
System Connector Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 11-7 HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 11-8 HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 11-9 HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Motherboard Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 11-10 HD11 System Connector Locations (E-Box Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 23
Contents
Figure 11-11 HD11 System Connector Locations (E-Box/Power Supply Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 11-12 HD11 System Connector Locations (Upper Rear I/O Panel on Back of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 11-13 HD11 System Connector Locations (Lower Rear I/O Panel on Back of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 11-14 HD11 Control Panel PCB Cable Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Miscellaneous Cable Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 11-15 Backplane-to-Signal Distribution Board Ribbon Cable, E-box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 11-16 Control Panel Cable Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 11-17 System to Source Power Cord, US, Canada, Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 11-18 System to Source Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Initial System Release
(v1.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Compatibility Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Table 13-1 Software Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Primary PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 13-1 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 13-2 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (E-Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 24
Contents
Figure 13-3 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Rear Upper I/O Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
PC PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 13-4 Motherboard PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 13-5 Graphics PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 13-6 TVIEW Gold Video Converter PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 13-7 Serial Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 13-8 Hauppauge Video Capture PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 13-9 E-box Interface PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 13-10 Sound Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
E-Box PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 13-11 Backplane PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 13-12 Signal Distribution PCB, Front (Connector Module Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 13-13 Signal Distribution PCB, Back (E-box Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 13-14 Signal Processor PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 13-15 Galil Motion Control (3D Motor Controller) PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 13-16 Transmit and Receive (TR0, TR1, TR2, and TR3) PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Rear I/O Panel PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 13-17 Video I/O PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Control Panel PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 13-18 Control Panel PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
E-box Interface Board Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 25
Contents
Figure 13-19 E-box Interface Board DIP Switch Location and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Disk Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Hard Disk Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 13-20 Hard Disk Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
CD Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 13-21 CD-RW Drive Jumper Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
MOD Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 13-2 Default BIOS Setting Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Viewing and Adjusting BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
➤ To view (and restore) the BIOS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
➤ To change the boot sequence temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Peripheral Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
B&W Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table 13-3 UP-D895MD B&W Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Color Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table 13-4 HS-MD3000U/E VCR Control and Switch Settings for the HD11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 13-22 HS-MD3000U/E VCR RS-232 Interface Adapter (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Figure 13-23 HS-MD3000U/E VCR RS-232 Interface Adapter (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Table 13-5 HS-MD3000U/E VCR Displayed Menu Settings
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 26
Contents
for the HD11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
➤ To change the VCR displayed menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table 13-6 Mitsubishi HS-MD3000E/U VCR Hidden Menu Settings
for the HD11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
➤ To change the VCR hidden menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
How and Where to Find a Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 14-1 HD11 Ultrasound System Parts Locator Map (Front and Rear Views) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 14-2 HD11Ultrasound System Parts Locator Map (Right Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 14-3 Video Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 14-4 Video Monitor Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 14-5 Cable/Connector Access Panel (Video Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 14-6 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 14-7 Control Panel (Knobs, Transducer Holders, and Cable Hooks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 14-8 Control Panel (Keyboard and Trackball) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 14-9 Control Panel (Soft key Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 14-10 Control Panel (Trigger and Mechlok Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 14-11 System Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 27
Contents
Figure 14-12 Cart Base Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 14-13 Cart (Internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 14-14 PC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 14-15 PC Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 14-16 PC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 14-17 E-box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 14-18 E-box Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 14-19 Power Supply (Below E-box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 14-20 Rear I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 14-21 Lower I/O Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 14-22 Modem (V.90, Portable USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 14-23 PC and E-box Air Cooling Fan Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 14-24 Lift Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 14-25 Lift Column (Mechlok Assembly and Gas Strut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 14-26 B&W Printer Bay, Drawer, and Peripheral Top Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 14-27 Peripheral Mounting Plates and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 14-28 System Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 14-29 Foot Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 14-30 System Labeling (Left Side of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 14-31 HD11 System Accessory Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Parts Table Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 28
Contents
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Table 14-1 HD11 Ultrasound System Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Accessories and Options Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Table 14-2 HD11 Ultrasound System Accessories and Options Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Peripherals Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 14-3 Peripherals and Applicable Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Transducer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 15-1 Curved Array Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Table 15-2 Doppler Pencil Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Table 15-3 Linear Array Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Table 15-4 Sector Array Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Table 15-5 TEE Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Table 15-6 3D/4D Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table 15-7 HD11 System Transducer Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 29
General Information: Introduction
General Information
Introduction
This section describes the contents of this manual and provides the following information:
•
A general overview and physical description of the HD11 M2580A Ultrasound System (also
referred to as the HD11 system or the system)
•
A summary of system application, feature, and regulatory information
NOTE The information in this manual is based on the assumption that you are trained in the
operation of this system and that you will operate it as intended. For detailed user
information and instructions for operating the system, invoke the on-system Help feature (press ? Help on the soft key panel) or refer to the HD11 Getting Started manual.
More About
This Manual
This manual is organized as follows:
• Section 1, “General Information”: Provides a general overview of the HD11 system and this
document.
•
Section 2, “System Specifications”: Provides a summary of the system specifications.
•
Section 3, “Safety”: Identifies the safety information and is required reading for the service
representative.
•
Section 4, “Theory of Operation”: Provides a functional description of the system: A breakdown of the system functional elements and a description of their relationships and basic
principles of operation (how the system works).
•
Section 5, “Installation”: Provides step-by-step initial delivery pre-installation and installation
instructions for the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 30
General Information: More About This Manual
•
Section 6, “Performance Tests”: Includes test procedures for diagnosing problems with the
system and assuring its safe and accurate operation.
•
Section 7, “Adjustments”: Provides adjustment information for the system monitor. Except
for the monitor, there are no other calibration or alignment adjustments to make in the field
for this system. Except for the monitor, there are no other voltage adjustments to make in
the field for this system.
•
Section 8, “Preventive Maintenance”: Identifies activities supporting the quality assurance
audit (QAA) concept that you should perform in accordance with Customer Field Service
policy.
•
Section 9, “Troubleshooting”: Provides troubleshooting information that will assist you in
determining if a system is failing, and, if so, will help you isolate the cause.
•
Section 10, “Disassembly and Reassembly”: Provides specific information about system disassembly that may be required for the removal and installation of field-replaceable parts. If not
covered by a detailed procedure, the means of removing a system part can be discerned from
the illustrations in this section as well as from those in Section 13, “Configuration” and in
Section 14, “Parts”. Instructions for crating the system for shipment are also included.
•
Section 11, “Cabling”: Provides system signal and power interconnect information, cable part
number information, and (sold-with-system) peripheral connection diagrams.
•
Section 12, “Change History”: Chronicles the software and hardware changes associated
with specific software releases.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
System
Overview
HD11 Service Manual
Page 31
General Information: System Overview
•
Section 13, “Configuration”: Lists all the released software version part numbers for the system, identifies the primary system PCBs, and shows where these PCBs are located in the system. When applicable, additional PCB reference information is provided. This section also
contains configuration information such as the as-shipped system BIOS settings, hard disk
drive jumper positions, and the Philips-recommended settings for the optional peripherals
sold with the system.
•
Section 14, “Parts”: Provides field-replaceable part numbers and information for the system
parts that are not dependent upon system features and software versions (primary PCBs and
certain hardware assemblies). Call your Philips representative for the core information you
need to determine the compatibility of primary system PCBs and certain hardware assemblies with respect to the system software releases.
•
Section 15, “Transducer Information”: Summarizes general and part number information for
the transducers that can be used with the HD11 system.
The HD11 system, shown in Figure 1-1, is a general-purpose, mobile, software-controlled, diagnostic ultrasound system. Its function is to acquire, process, and display ultrasound data. The
HD11 system builds on the EnVisor architecture and feature set with added channels and new
software and hardware features. The appearance of the HD11 reflects the Philips standard color
scheme.
The operator can measure anatomical structures and generate reports for health-care professionals. The system has a basic set of imaging modes and measurement tools. There also are
modes and measurement tools that are available only when a specific mode or an analysis package is purchased and enabled for customer use.
Options (see “Options” on page 34) and upgrade security is controlled through the use of system-specific passwords and software.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 32
A system Help feature provides comprehensive instructions for using the HD11 system, on
screen, by pressing ? Help on the soft key panel. Help is available in English, and seven other languages (see “Languages” on page 34). It includes a glossary containing descriptions of all controls
and display elements.
Figure 1-1
HD11 Ultrasound System
Video monitor
Soft key panel
Control panel
Black-and-white printer bay
Optional VCR or color
printer (or both) location
System power supply
PC
E-box
Cart
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Applications
Modalities
HD11 Service Manual
Page 33
The following applications are available on the HD11 system. Refer to the user documentation
for detailed feature information regarding these applications:
•
Abdominal
•
Cardiac
•
Gynecological
•
Intraoperative
•
Musculoskeletal
•
Neonatal Head
•
Obstetrical
•
Pediatric
•
Small Parts
•
Transcranial
•
Transesophageal
•
Vascular
The following imaging modalities are available on the HD11 system. Refer to the user documentation for detailed feature information regarding these modes:
•
2D
•
M-mode
•
3D/4D
•
PW Doppler
•
CW Doppler
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
Color Flow
•
Color Power Angio
Page 34
Transducers
The system has five electronically switched transducer connectors, which can be any combination of cartridge, Explora, and pencil connector types. Optionally, one of the five available connector slots can be dedicated to a pencil probe. If more than one pencil probe connector
module is installed, only one of them will be recognized by the system. See Section 15, “Transducer Information” for a list of transducers supported by the system.
Languages
The system software supports the following languages:
Options
•
English
•
French
•
German
•
Italian
•
Spanish
•
Japanese
•
Russian
•
Simplified Chinese
The following options are available for installation through the option configuration utility:
•
Contrast
•
Stress
•
DICOM Networking
•
Panoramic
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 35
•
Vascular
•
Cardiac
•
General Imaging
•
OB/GYN (includes Freehand 3D)
•
XRes
•
SonoCT
•
4D Fetal Heart (requires the 4D hardware be installed)
•
3D Color (requires the 4D hardware be installed)
The basic 4D package is a not a software-configurable option—instead, it is a hardware option
requiring that the motor controller board be purchased and installed in the system. The Fetal
Heart option, mentioned in the preceding list, will only function if the basic 4D option has been
installed.
The HD11 system software contains all of the possible “software options.” The same software is
loaded into all systems. Each system can be set up in accordance with a customer's needs
because most of the system options are “software only” features. A section of the software is
“enabled” to allow an option to operate.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Peripherals
Reference
Information
HD11 Service Manual
Page 36
The HD11 supports various types of peripheral devices:
•
VCRs, both NTSC-format and PAL-format models
•
Thermal color and thermal black-and-white (B&W) printers
•
Report printers: At initial release, print drivers for the following report printers are included
in the system software, but these printers cannot be purchased from Philips. Print drivers
may be added to support additional report printers as they are released:
-
HP Deskjet 5650
-
HP LaserJet 1320
-
HP Deskjet 6122
-
HP Business Inkjet 1100d
-
HP Color LaserJet 2550L
In addition to this service manual, HD11 system reference documentation includes:
•
A Getting Started manual
•
A Quick Guide
•
Acoustic Output Display Tables
•
Crate Instructions
•
AIUM Medical Ultrasound Safety Booklet
•
Online Help (an on-system electronic guide, accessed via the keyboard portion of the control panel, that assists system operators in using the product software and hardware)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 37
General Information: Physical Description
Physical
Description
The HD11 physical structure is made of fabricated sheet metal and molded plastic parts. The system (Figure 1-1) consists of a cart, a user interface (control panel), a visual display (video monitor), and the ultrasound electronic components. The major ultrasound components are the PC,
the E-box, and the system power supply.
Cart
The cart is made up of a base and framework that provides a chassis on which all system components are installed and interconnected.
Swivel-casters at the four corners of the cart base provide system maneuverability and braking.
The front casters can be fixed straight and locked, or unlocked, by foot-operated wheel locks to
mobilize or immobilize the system as needed.
A vertical and horizontal adjustment feature allows physical positioning of the control panel and
monitor. The control panel and the monitor adjust up and down and swivel as a unit. The monitor also independently tilts and swivels on its mount.
Input/output (I/O) panels (upper and lower) installed into the rear of the cart framing provide for
external system connections (see “I/O Panels” on page 73).
System Control
Panel
The control panel (Figure 1-2) is a replaceable, self-contained module. The control panel
physically connects with the imaging system through a USB cable that connects to the internal
PC. The USB cable provides power for the trackball, the Enter and Select keys, and the
QWERTY keyboard. All the other control-panel functions are powered by a cable from the
system power supply.
The system control panel contains a backlit alphanumeric keyboard, slide controls, knobs,
hard-coded and software-driven keys, and a trackball.
The system control panel includes two numbered option keys (Option 1 and Option 2) whose
functions are assigned by the customer. For details on configuring these controls, see the HD11
Help.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 1-2
Page 38
HD11 Ultrasound System Control Panel and Soft Key Panel
Soft key panel
Control panel
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 39
System Monitor
The video monitor (Figure 1-1) is a 15-in color display mounted on a “twivel” assembly. The
twivel allows tilt and swivel positioning of the display for ease of viewing.
PC
Behind the left-side system cover (Figure 1-1), the HD11 uses a commercial personal computer
(PC) tower as a central processor running Microsoft Windows XP Embedded Operating System
software.
This PC houses several electronic components, which include the PC power supply, an E-box
input/output board, a 3-board video circuit, the system hard disk drive (HDD), a CD-RW drive,
and, when installed, the optional magneto-optical disk (MOD) drive.
The optional Physio module installs in one of the PC’s front drive bays.
The VCR option boards reside in the PC PCI slots when installed.
E-box
System Power
Supply
Behind the right-side system cover (Figure 1-1), is the E-box, a card cage that houses the
ultrasound signal generation and echo acquisition circuits. The E-box shares system framework
that provides mounting for the transducer connector modules. The following ultrasound system
electronic circuits are contained in the E-box:
•
A system Motherboard (backplane)
•
A Signal Distribution Board
•
Four Transmit and Receive (TR) Boards (TR0, TR1, TR2, and TR3)
•
A Signal Processor Board
•
A Motor Controller Board
The system power supply—an enclosed, self-contained, replaceable module—is mounted under
the E-box (Figure 1-1).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 40
General Information: Device Safety Requirements and Regulatory Compliance
Cables
Physical cables provide system signal interconnect and power distribution. Refer to Section 11,
“Cabling”, for detailed cable information.
Optional
Peripherals
The VCR, the color printer, or both mount on a shelf on top of the cart (Figure 1-1). The B&W
printer mounts in a bay below the system control panel (Figure 1-1). Figure 1-3 shows the OEM
peripherals that can be ordered for the system.
Plain-paper printers supported by the system are not mounted on or powered by the system.
Device Safety
Requirements
and
Regulatory
Compliance
The HD11 Ultrasound System complies with the requirements for the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), the Canadian Standard Association (CSA), and the Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
•
IEC 60601-1
•
IEC 60601-1-2, 2nd edition (Class B)
•
CSA22.2 No. 601.1
•
UL 2601-1
For information about applicable safety standards and specifications, see the HD11 Getting Started
manual shipped with the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 1-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 41
General Information: Device Safety Requirements and Regulatory Compliance
System Peripherals
UP-D895MD Sony Digital Black-and-White Printer
HS-MD3000U/E Mitsubishi Video Cassette Recorder
UP-D23MD Sony Digital Color Printer
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Supplies and
Accessories
HD11 Service Manual
Page 42
General Information: Supplies and Accessories
Ultrasound supplies and accessories, including transducer biopsy guides, kits, and covers or
sheaths, are available from CIVCO Medical Instruments at the addresses and numbers below.
Supplies and accessories are no longer available from Philips Ultrasound.
CIVCO Medical Instruments
102 First St. South
Kalona, IA 52247-9589
Phone:
(800) 445-6741, Ex. 1 for Customer Service (USA)
Fax:
+1 319-656-4447 (International)
(877) 329-2482 (USA)
E-mail:
Internet:
+1 319-656-4451 (International)
info@civcomedical.com
www.civco.com
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 43
System Specifications: Introduction
System Specifications
Introduction
This section summarizes the system specifications for the HD11 Ultrasound System.
Physical
Specifications
Dimensions
•
Height (bottom of caster to top of monitor):
-
Lowest position: <130.8 cm (51.5 in)
-
Highest position: <148.6 cm (58.5 in)
•
Width: <55.8 cm (22 in)
•
Depth: <111.76 cm (44 in)
Weight
Less than 100 kg (220 lb) including monitor, and without peripherals.
Electrical
Specifications
•
AC input: 90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz
•
Ground impedance: 100 mΩ maximum
•
Dielectric withstand:
-
1,500 Vac mains to safety ground
-
4,000 Vac mains to AC secondaries
•
Load: 1,150 VA maximum.
•
AC output (including PC): non-sinusoidal 120 VRMS, 350 VA maximum
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Environmental
Specifications
Page 44
System Specifications: Environmental Specifications
Operational
•
Temperature range: 0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F)
•
Relative humidity: 20% to 80% noncondensing
•
VCR and printers temperature limit: 0°C to +40°C at 80% RH
Storage
•
Temperature range: –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
•
Relative humidity: 20% to 90%, noncondensing
System PC
Specifications
The HD11 PC BIOS is BF86510A.0058.P19 or later. Table 2-1 lists the PC hardware specifications. See Table 13-2 for the HD11 factory default PC BIOS setting exceptions.
Table 2-1
PC Hardware Specifications
Component
Description
Motherboard
Chip set
Processor
Processor speed
Intel D865GBFL
Intel 865G
Intel P4
3.0 GHz minimum, Hyperthreaded
RAM installed
1-GB DDR400. Memory must be from the Intel
Tested Memory List.
4 GB or greater
800 MHz minimum
80 GB minimum, 7,200 rpm minimum, with 2-MB
buffer minimum
RAM capacity
Frontside bus
Hard disk drive
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 2-1
Page 45
System Specifications: System PC Specifications
PC Hardware Specifications (Continued)
Component
Description
Floppy Disk
AGP slot
PCI Slots 5 V 32-bit minimum, 3.3 V 66 MHz
64-bit preferred
LAN
Audio
CD-RW drive
-4x and 8x
Five free slots minimum. Additional slots required
if audio and LAN are not on motherboard.
10/100 Mb/s
Line in, line out, Mic in (16-bit, 44-kHz stereo)
CD-RW, DVD-ROM (40x write, 12x rewrite, 40x
read) 32x minimum
Video Display Adapter
Power Supply
AC voltage
Bios
Wake on Ring
Miscellaneous I/O
Note: This device is labeled “DVD,” but this drive
can only be used to write to CDs, not DVDs
Radeon 7,000 64-MB AGP card
ATX12V, 300 W minimum
115-V/ 230-V switch—selectable (set to 115 V),
or auto select
Flashable with user-writable area for custom
splash screen
Desired
Four rear panel USB minimum (motherboard
mounted), three internal routed to back of chassis,
and one internal to PC case minimum (for the
Physio Module)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 2-1
Page 46
Component
Description
Serial Port
One required on motherboard, set up as COM1
and one as additional PCI card.
None desired—will use custom devices
Custom Philips case. Case will have a power
button on the rear of the chassis that is in parallel
with power button on the control panel. The case
shall also provide an LED mounting location on
the front of the chassis that allows the Hard Disk
Drive active LED to be visible from the front of
the machine.
Three 5.25 in
Mouse and Keyboard
Mini Tower Case
Front accessible drive bays
Internal drive bays
IDE cables
One 3.5 in
One 3.5in
Primary IDE cable must support UDMA 66, ATA/
100 or Primary cable may be Serial ATA
Secondary IDE cable must be able to
simultaneously connect to drives whose keyway is
up (missing pin down) in the top and bottom bays.
HDD LED Cable
Custom Philips cable mounted T1 yellow LED
connects to HDD LED pins on front panel header
on motherboard
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 2-1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 47
Component
Description
PC Power Cable
Custom Philips cable that plugs into front panel
header on motherboard; drive bay power plug;
switch on rear panel and 9-pin sub-D connector
on rear panel.
From the Top Down:
Additional PCI boards installed
Radeon 7,000 64-MB AGP card in the AGP slot
Focus TVIEW Gold PCI card (S-Video jack
connected to PCI bracket with 0.5-in x 1-in piece
of 3M #1345 HD 2172-05 tape)
SIIG Cyber Serial card – Single Fast 16550 Serial
Port
Hauppauge Video Input card (S-Video jack
connected to PCI bracket with 0.5-in x 1-in piece
of 3M #1345 HD 2172-05 tape)
Blank – we install our E-box Interface Board here
Creative SB0229 Sound Card
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 2-1
Page 48
System Specifications: Monitor Specifications
Component
Description
EMC filtering
Amphenol part # FCC17-E09AD-240 mounted on
rear connector of SIIG Cyber Serial card
Include cables from Focus TVIEW Gold PCI card
Accessories
Monitor
Specifications
The monitor is an RGB, 15-in FST, plastic enclosed, display monitor with an integrated microphone.
•
AC Power: 75 to 143 Vac (RMS) at 47 to 66 Hz
•
Screen size: 15-in diagonal
•
0.28 mm, or better, RGB phosphor dot trio pitch
•
Internal automatic line operated degaussing coil
•
50-MHz minimum video bandwidth
•
800 dots minimum per horizontal line
•
Monitor-supported video formats:
-
60-Hz vertical non-interlaced frames and horizontal lines at 31.5 kHz
-
50-Hz vertical non-interlaced frames and horizontal lines at 31.3 kHz
-
640 x 480 VGA at 60 Hz
-
800 x 600 VGA at 75 Hz
-
Interlaced video with 30-Hz vertical 2:1 interlaced frames and horizontal lines at
15.7 kHz
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
-
Page 49
System Specifications: Monitor Specifications
Interlaced video with 25-Hz vertical 2:1 interlaced frames and horizontal lines at
15.6 kHz (PAL timing)
Three different color temperature settings are user selectable. The image presented is smaller
than a normal 15-in FST image, with only a portion of the phosphor region actively scanned.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 50
Safety: Introduction
Safety
Introduction
This section summarizes the safety information for the HD11 Ultrasound System.
About Safety
Information
Please read this and related information before using or servicing a Philips ultrasound system. It applies to the ultrasound system, transducers, recording devices, and any
optional equipment.
This system is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of a licensed
physician qualified to direct the use of the device.
In this manual, WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause personal
injury, death, or substantial property damage if the warning is ignored.
In this manual, CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause equipment damage if the caution is ignored.
In this manual, NOTE is used when additional comment or explanation is required about installation, operation, or maintenance information that is important but not necessarily hazard-related.
General
Operating
Safety
Read the HD11 Getting Started for detailed safety and standards information for the HD11 Ultrasound System. This guide includes critical information about the intended uses of the HD11 system, patient and operator safety, and device standards. This is information that maintenance
personnel should be aware of.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 51
Safety: Electrical Safety
Electrical
Safety
This equipment has been verified by a recognized third-party testing agency as a Class I device
with Type BF and Type CF isolated patient-applied parts and Type B accessories. For maximum
safety observe these warnings:
WARNINGS
•
Do not connect the ultrasound system to the same circuit used for life-support devices.
•
Shock hazards may exist if this system, including all externally mounted recording and monitoring devices, is not properly grounded. Protection against electrical shock is provided by
grounding the chassis with a three-wire cable and plug. The system must be plugged into a
grounded outlet. The grounding wire must not be removed or defeated.
•
To avoid risks of electrical shock and fire hazards, inspect the system power cord and plug on
a regular basis. Ensure that they are not damaged in any way.
•
Do not remove the protective covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present inside.
Cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjustments and
replacements must be made by a qualified Philips Ultrasound field service engineer.
•
Do not operate this system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics. Explosion can
result from electrical ignition.
•
To avoid risk of electrical shock hazards, always disconnect the system from the wall outlet
before cleaning the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
WARNINGS
HD11 Service Manual
Page 52
•
To avoid risk of electrical shock hazards, always inspect transducers before use: Check the
face, housing, and cable before use. Do not use if the face is cracked, chipped, or torn; the
housing is damaged; or the cable is abraded.
•
To avoid risk of electrical shock, do not use any transducer that has been immersed beyond
the specified cleaning or disinfection level.
•
All patient-contact devices, such as transducers, pencil probes, and ECG leads must be
removed from the patient contact prior to application of a high-voltage defibrillation pulse.
•
Connection of optional devices not supplied by Philips Ultrasound could result in electrical
shock. When such optional devices are connected to your ultrasound system, ensure that
the total system earth leakage current does not exceed 300 μA.
•
Avoid placing the system in an environment that may produce electrostatic discharges (ESD)
that could affect the ultrasound system performance. (Electrostatic discharges can cause the
ECG heart rate display to increase by 10% to 15% for a few seconds after the discharge, even
though the ECG heart rate display returns to normal within a few seconds. See “About Electrostatic Discharge” on page 56.
•
Avoid placing the system in an environment that may produce electromagetic interference
(EMI) that could impact the diagnosis of a patient. (Only a physician can determine if an artifact caused by radiated interference has a negative impact on image quality and the subsequent diagnosis. See “Avoiding EMI and RF” on page 53.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Avoiding EMI
and RF
HD11 Service Manual
Page 53
Although the system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI/EMC requirements,
use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause momentary degradation
of the ultrasound image. If this occurs often, review the environment in which the system is
being used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from
other electrical devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication
devices such as cellular phones and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of radio, TV,
or microwave transmission equipment located nearby can cause emissions. In cases where EMI is
causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate your system.
Electrosurgical units (ESUs) and other devices intentionally introduce radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic fields or currents into patients. Because imaging ultrasound frequencies are also in
the RF range, ultrasound transducer circuits are susceptible to RF interference. While an ESU is
in use, the noise generated can severely interfere with the black-and-white image and completely
obliterate the color image.
CAUTION
Avoid placing the system in an environment that may produce electrostatic discharges (ESD) that
could damage the ultrasound system. (See “About Electrostatic Discharge” on page 56.)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 54
Safety: Mechanical Safety
Mechanical
Safety
Although the system is designed to be mobile, remember that it is very heavy, and that you must
take precautions when moving it. The physical aspects of this system present a hazard that can
cause injury, property damage, or equipment damage if the following information is ignored:
WARNINGS.
•
Before moving the system, be sure to power it off, remove any loose equipment from the top
of the system, disconnect the system power cord, and disconnect all external devices. Move
and secure external devices away from the system.
•
Make sure the control top is locked, to prevent its pivoting and unlock the caster locks
before moving the system. Push with the handle at the front of the cart. After the system is
in position, engage the caster locks to immobilize the system.
•
Be aware of the casters as well as the extremities of the system when moving it. The system
is heavy enough in any configuration that it can cause injury to you or others. Exercise additional caution when going up or down inclines.
•
When attempting to overcome an obstacle, do not push the system with enough force to
cause it to tip over. Do not exceed 10 degrees of incline.
•
Never park the system on an incline.
•
For transport, make sure the control top is locked and secure the system so that it cannot
roll or tip. Engage the caster locks and use wheel chocks and restraining straps. Do not
attempt to hold the system in place manually. Never strap or secure the system at any point
on the control top or monitor.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
CAUTIONS
HD11 Service Manual
Page 55
Safety: General Equipment Protection
•
Ensure that the cables for all patient-applied parts are secure before moving the system. Use
the cable management system to ensure that transducer cables are protected from damage.
•
Do not roll the system over transducer cables or power cables.
•
If the system behaves abnormally after moving or transporting, contact Philips Ultrasound
Customer Service immediately. The components can withstand considerable shock, but
excessive shock can cause a system failure.
General
Equipment
Protection
Follow these additional precautions to protect the system from damage:
CAUTIONS
•
For optimal performance, the ultrasound system should be connected to a power circuit
dedicated solely for the ultrasound system.
•
Verify system and peripheral power sources are appropriate before connecting to them.
•
Avoid placing the system in an environment that may produce electrostatic discharges (ESD)
that could damage the ultrasound system. See “About Electrostatic Discharge” on page 56.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
CAUTIONS
About Electrostatic Discharge
Page 56
Safety: General Equipment Protection
•
Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may cause failure or intermittent operation of the system. Take care not to run over cables with the system, which may
damage them.
•
In general, only the area of the transducer acoustic window is watertight. Except where
specified in specific transducer cleaning instructions, do not immerse the remainder of a
transducer in any liquid.
•
Practice proper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part to avoid damage.
•
Do not submerge the cables of patient-applied parts in solution. The cables are not liquidtight beyond the applied part/cable or cable/connector interfaces.
•
Do not use solvents such as thinner or benzine or abrasive cleaners on the system, transducers, video monitor, touch screen, or any printer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring
phenomenon. ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by
heating or air-conditioning. During low-humidity conditions, electrical charges naturally build up
on individuals and can create static shocks.
An ESD condition occurs when an individual with an electrical energy buildup comes in contact
with objects such as metal doorknobs, file cabinets, computer equipment, and even other individuals. The static shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy buildup from a charged
individual to a lesser or non-charged individual or object.
The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to the ultrasound system
can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or transducers. The following precautions can help to reduce ESD: antistatic spray on carpets; antistatic spray on linoleum; antistatic
mats; or a ground wire connection between the system and the patient table or bed.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 57
Safety: Symbols
ESD Safeguards
Follow these general ESD guidelines to minimize deterioration or destruction of ESD-sensitive
electronic components:
Symbols
•
Avoid working in carpeted areas.
•
If you use a vacuum cleaner to clean the interior of any part of the system sensitive to static
electricity, take the necessary ESD precautions to avoid static buildup and discharge.
•
Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
•
Use a grounding mat for assembly work on sensitive areas.
The International Electrotechnical Commission has established a set of symbols for medical electronic equipment that classify a connection or warn of potential hazards. The classifications and
symbols are shown below.
Isolated patient connection. (Type BF)
Isolated patient connection for applied parts in direct contact with
major vessels. (Type CF)
Identifies the On/Standby switch.
On the PC power switch, represents ON and OFF.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 58
Safety: Symbols
This symbol identifies a safety note. Ensure you understand the
function of this control before using it. Refer to the appropriate
section of the system documentation for an explanation of the
control.
Identifies equipotential ground.
IPx-1
IPx-7
Indicates that this device is protected against the effects of fluid
immersion. This degree of protection can apply to transducers and
the foot switch.
This product consists of devices that may contain lead or mercury,
which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local,
state, or federal laws.
Do not throw away. Dispose of in accordance with local, state, or
federal laws.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 59
Safety: Symbols
The following symbols are also used on the system:
The ECG-input (12-pin connector) is isolated from chassis ground.
The phone plug jack (1/4-inch) auxiliary input has both signal and
shield grounds.
Foot switch connection
Serial port connection
External VGA connection
S-Video connection
B&W composite video connection
Color composite video connection
Trigger Miniphone connection
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 60
Safety: Symbols
Phone line jack
Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection
Ethernet connection
The following symbols are used inside the system:
Identifies high-voltage components.
Identifies the point where the safety system ground is fastened to
the chassis.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
4
HD11 Service Manual
Page 61
Theory of Operation: Introduction
Theory of Operation
Introduction
This section provides a functional overview of the HD11 Ultrasound System by breaking down
the system into functional elements and describing their relationships and basic principles of
operation.
System
Architecture
The HD11 system is fundamentally a combination of the following functional elements:
•
Physical assemblies comprising the mobile cart and system components
•
Electrical power functions
•
Ultrasound signal generation and control functions
•
Echo acquisition and control functions
•
Signal and image data processing and analysis functions
•
Visual and audio presentation functions (image management and review)
The HD11 physical structure is made of fabricated sheet metal and molded plastic parts and
commercial “off-the-shelf” (COTS) components.
At a basic level, the HD11 ultrasound hardware architecture consists of an E-box and a COTS
personal computer tower (PC). The E-box contains custom electronics (boards) that perform
many of the ultrasound imaging functions in the system, such as transducer selection, transmit
generation, beam forming, demodulation, detection, and image processing. The PC acts a a central processing unit, performing further processing of the image data, including the generation of
the image display to the screen. The PC also serves as the main controller of the E-box and the
system user interface, as well as the organizer of all of the image management functionality.
The HD11 software architecture consists of four major executables: beam processing control
(E-box), signal processing control (E-box), imaging modalities (PC), and image management and
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 62
Theory of Operation: Functional Description
review (PC). These executables communicate with each other over a high-speed serial link by
using a proprietary token ring network.
Functional
Description
Figure 4-1 is a simplified block diagram, showing the relationship of the electrical components
that make up the HD11 system, indicating the primary functional tasks performed by each.
The location and identification of the physical parts of the system are described in the General
Information, Cabling, Configuration, and Parts sections of this document. The functional nature
of each is described in the following sections.
After operating power is applied, the electronics and software combine to support the production of ultrasound images. The user interface allows system control and viewing of the results.
The HD11 system produces 2D, M-mode, color Doppler, Color Power Angio imaging, Doppler,
3D, and, if equipped with the supporting hardware, 4D ultrasound images through the use of
transducers, digital beam forming, and Doppler processing.
The system stores the ultrasound images and patient data on the hard disk drive and can copy
that data to the removable media (CD-R/W and optional magneto-optical disks) for offline
review. The system can send these images to a black-and-white printer, to a color printer, or to
a VCR. It also generates printable reports.
Physical
Functions
The HD11 physical structure is made of fabricated sheet metal and molded plastic parts. The system consists of a cart, a user interface (control panel), a visual display (video monitor), and the
ultrasound electronic components. The major ultrasound components are the transducers, the
PC, the E-box, and the system power supply. For more information about the physical elements
of the system see “Physical Description” on page 37.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
System
Operating
Power
HD11 Service Manual
Page 63
System power development and distribution is provided by the installation site source voltage,
the system power supply, the E-box Backplane Board and Signal Distribution Board power buses,
and the power interconnect cables. The PC has its own power supply, but it gets its AC source
voltage from the system power supply.
System Power Supply
The system power supply is a self-contained unit that accepts AC mains voltage inputs from 80
to 276 Vac (100 to 240 Vac, nominal) having a line frequency of 47 to 63 Hz (50 to 60 Hz, nominal) and produces the AC and DC voltages (Table 4-1) that power the system components.
There is no On/Off switch on the system power supply. Power is applied whenever the system’s
(country-specific) power cord is connected to the AC mains voltage. Except for the (always
on)120-Vac source AC to the PC power supply, all power output is activated by a signal from the
PC. The system power supply activates when it receives the “awake” signal, generated by the PC.
Table 4-1
Power Supply Output Voltages
Voltage
Use
Lv (selectable from
0.85 to 2.25 Vdc)
+2.5 Vdc
+3.3 Vdc
TR Boards, Signal Processor Board
+5 Vdc
– 5 Vdc
TR Boards, Signal Processor Board
TR Boards, Motor Controller Board, Signal
Processor Board
TR Boards, Motor Controller Board, Backplane
TR Boards, Signal Processor Board, Backplane
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 4-1
Page 64
Power Supply Output Voltages (Continued)
Voltage
Use
+12 Vdc
Processor Board, Backplane
Processor Board, Backplane
TR Boards
TR Boards
TR Boards, Signal Distribution Board, Backplane,
Transducer Connector Modules
TR Boards, Signal Distribution Board, Backplane,
Transducer Connector Modules
Signal Processor Board, Transducer Connector
Modules
Signal Distribution Board, Transducer Connector
Modules
One outlet for PC mains, three outlets for
peripherals
–12 Vdc
+HV
– HV
+100 V
–100 V
+5 C
+11 C
120 Vac
The following is a summary of the system power supply features:
•
There are no operator-accessible fuses or adjustments.
•
The system power supply has an “on” mode and a “sleep” mode that shuts off all the DC
power and the switched AC outlets, and turns off the fans if the internal temperatures are
acceptable.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 65
•
Fault Protection: The AC outputs are fault-protected from an overload condition (including
turn-on surges). The AC input may be cycled to restore power.
•
A fan interlock exists that must be completed to enable the power supply to generate any
DC or AC output voltage.
•
Overcurrent Protection: All outputs have overcurrent protection to protect damage to the
power supply from overcurrent load or short circuit conditions. Latched AC outputs will be
reset once the input power is cycled. A DC overcurrent condition must be present for
more than 2 ms before it will trip the overcurrent latch. The latched DC output will be reset
once the power supply enters the sleep mode or if the input power is cycled.
•
Indicators: The power supply has green LED indicators that illuminate when their power
function is active. There is one LED for indicating that AC mains power is present and an
LED indicating each non-fan DC output that has not shut down due to a fault. Except for the
AC OK LED, another of which is on the back of the supply above the power inlet, these
indicators are located on the top rear of the power supply and are only visible if the right system side cover is removed:
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
Page 66
Test Points: All DC voltages are accessible for measurement via external, impedance-protected connectors located on the top rear of the power supply, above the LEDs.
PC Power Supply
The PC has its own power supply, which receives mains AC power from the system power supply. It is a typical modern PC power supply that establishes four output voltages (+5 Vdc, –5 Vdc,
+12 Vdc, –12 Vdc) and one “power good” status output in support of the PC electronics.
Power Distribution
System power distribution diagrams are shown in Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3. The system
power supply output voltages and purpose are listed in Table 4-1.
•
The system power supply sources +2 V, +2.5 V, +3.3 V, ±5 V, ±12 V, ± HV, ± 100 V, +5 C and
+11 C to the Backplane Board, which distributes ±HV, ±100 V, +5 C and +11 C to the Signal
Distribution Board. The Signal Distribution Board delivers these voltages to the Transducer
Connector modules.
•
The ±HV goes from the power supply through the backplane board (where it receives additional filtering and regulation) to the TR board.
•
The Signal Distribution Board delivers transmit pulses and controls from the TR boards to
the transducer connector modules and returns signals and status from the transducer connector modules to the TR boards.
•
A USB cable that provides power for the QWERTY keyboard, trackball, and the Enter and
Select keys
•
An auxiliary cable that provides power for the rest of the keyboard keys, the backlighting,
and the amplifier for the speakers
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Operating
System
E-box Functions
Page 67
The full-service, real-time Windows XP Embedded operating system provides an integrated
range of resources: drivers and handlers for storage, video, serial and parallel ports, and support
of file system services and graphical user interfaces. The operating system is resident on the PC
hard disk drive. The system software performs these tasks:
•
Processes requests from the control panel
•
Sets up beam-forming parameters
•
Processes acquired ultrasound echoes into digital visual representations for conversion into
analog signals
•
Performs measurements and calculations on acquired data
•
Stores acquired data (such as images and user-entered data) for subsequent retrieval
•
Performs all necessary functions to coordinate software tasks
The E-box contains the electronics that perform many of the ultrasound imaging functions in the
system, such as transducer selection, transmit generation, beam forming, demodulation, detection, and image processing. The E-box supports transmit and receive channels.
Power, Signal, and Data Distribution
•
•
Signal Distribution Board
-
Passes transducer control signals to the imaging system
-
Receives transducer identification signals from the Signal Processor Board
-
Passes transmit and receive signals from the TR boards to the active transducer
Backplane Board
-
E-box backplane connects all data paths between the TR boards, MC, and SPB
-
Distribution point for DC power and ground to all boards
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 68
-
Power supply provides high voltage directly to the Backplane board to fire transducers
-
The backplane board provides additional filtering and regulation before it passes the HV
to the TR boards
-
Physical and signal interface
Pulse Generation, Summation, Beam Forming, Processing, Steering
The pulse generation, summation, beam forming, processing, and steering functions are supported by the following hardware:
•
Transducer Connector Modules—HD11 supports five active transducers. HD11 supports
both the AdvanceVision (sometimes referred to as “Honda” or Cartridge) transducer line
and the new Explora connector transducers. Additionally, HD11 supports the Philips standard CW pencil probe connector. The connector modules accommodate the pinout and signals required by the Explora and pencil transducers.
•
TR Boards—The HD11 E-box contains four transmit and receive boards (TR0, TR1, TR2,
and TR3). Each has two connectors that plug into the Backplane board and another connector that passes over the Backplane and plugs into the Signal Distribution board. The two
boards form electronic beams of the transmit and receive signals. Each receive channel consists of time gain compensation (TGC) amplifiers, low-pass filters, 10-bit analog-to-digital (A/
D) converters, and part of the digital beam-forming circuit. Each TR board sends on its output bus a value that is the sum of the data from its channels plus its 18-bit input bus. The last
TR board in this chain outputs the final summed RF data to the Signal Processor Board. The
transmit and receive beam-forming coefficients for acoustic lines are downloaded on the
coefficient bus from the Signal Processor Board.
-
Transmit and receive channels
-
Transmit pulse generation
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
•
Page 69
-
TGC amplification
-
A/D conversion
-
Summation of echo (receive) data
-
Transmit and receive beam forming
-
Received signal is pre-amplified, TGC amplified, low-pass filtered, and digitized except for
CW
3D Motor Controller Board—HD11 supports live 3D imaging with mechanical “wobbler”
linear array transducers. The 3D transducers are steered by this motor control board
manufactured by Galil Motion Control.
-
Steers 3D transducers
-
Receives TEE motor control and temperature-sense signals from the Signal Processor
Board
-
Provides CW steering
Signal Processor Board—The Signal Processor Board uses a very large Field Programmable
Gate Array (FPGA). Surrounding the MOAC FPGA are the beam processor (BP), which is
used for control of the beam forming and demodulation functions, and the acoustic
processor (AP), which is used for control of the scan conversion, color/Doppler processing,
and image processing. The acoustic processor has more increased speed and memory access
than previous systems.
-
Performs acoustic processing
-
Controls beam forming and demodulation
-
Performs scan conversion
-
Processes color Doppler
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
PC Functions
HD11 Service Manual
Page 70
-
Performs Image processing
-
Provides the interface between the PC and the TR boards
-
Receives control data sets from PC, processes register values, sends to TR boards
-
Houses the transesophageal echocardiography control and temperature monitoring
-
Houses the transducer ID circuitry
-
Detects the presence of stand-alone transducers
-
Houses electronic switching that allows selection of a single active transducer
-
Controls high-voltage output from the system power supply
-
Provides digital filters and mixers for demodulating 2D, color flow, and PW RF data
-
Houses independent transducer CW Doppler electronics and steerable CW detector
-
Generates the120-MHz system clock
-
Houses the circuitry that generates TGC signals
The PC contains the electronics, firmware, and software that comprise a central processing unit,
performing further processing of the image data, including the generation of the image display to
the screen. The PC also serves as the main controller of the E-box and the system user interface, as well as the organizer of all of the image management functionality. See “System PC Specifications” on page 44 for a summary of the PC technical specifications.
PC Motherboard
The motherboard and its major elements (the processor chipset, the BIOS, and the cache) control the computer functions of the system. The motherboard is the physical and electronic interface of the computer (see Figure 4-1).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 71
TV Video Capture Card
The graphics (video capture) card in the AGP slot receives S-Video signals from the VCR, converts the analog video signals into a digital format, and then stores the digital video on the hard
disk drive.
Serial Interface Card
The Serial interface card, in a PCI slot, provides one RS-232 serial port. The card implements
control signals for compatibility with serial data peripherals.
TVIEW Gold Video Converter Card
The TVIEW Gold Video Convertor card is an SVGA-to-S-Video card that converts the SVGA
signal from the graphics adapter board (in the AGP slot) to S-Video for the VCR, and composite
video to the rear I/O panel.
An SVGA adapter cable connects to the AGP Graphics Card and the TVIEW Gold Card
This cable connects to the AGP Graphics Card and the TView Gold Card. The monitor cable
attaches to this cable on the Graphics card side.
E-box Interface Board
The E-box Interface Board, located in a PCI slot, provides the following:
•
Foot switch input
•
R-wave pulse from the physio module to the Signal Processor Board
•
DC on-off bit that is sent to the power supply
•
Commands that program the Signal Processor Board at start-up
•
Acoustic data from the Signal Processor Board for the acoustic imaging display
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 72
Sound Card
The Sound card sends audio to and receives audio from the VCR.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
The HDD, housed in the PC and connected via an EIDE slot, contains the embedded operating
system, ultasound application software, and COTS software. The HDD stores AP&I data and
ultrasound images.
CD-RW
The CD-RW drive, housed in the PC and connected via an EIDE slot, is a removeable-media
device used for image and report archiving and system upgrading.
Magneto-optical Disk (MOD) Drive
The MOD drive, housed in the PC and connected via an EIDE slot, is a removeable-media device
used for image and report archiving.
Physio Module
The optional Physio module is housed in th E-box and has the following functions:
•
Provides ECG monitoring capability
•
Processes ECG signals from patient electrodes and deliver the data to the system PC Motherboard through a USB cable
•
Sends a detected R-wave to the E-box Interface board for frame triggering
•
Provides gain control for ECG waveforms
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
System Control
Panel
Page 73
The system control panel contains the circuitry to process control inputs from the system keyboard, the knobs and slide controls, and the trackball. It includes the following functions:
•
A USB cable that provides power for the QWERTY keyboard, the trackball, and the Enter
and Select keys
•
An auxiliary cable that provides power for the rest of the keyboard keys, backlighting, and
the amplifier for the speakers
All control inputs and LEDs are controlled by the system’s PC, and their functions are determined by resident control-panel and system software.
Circuit boards inside the system control panel are not field serviceable or replaceable. The
entire assembly, including circuit boards, bezel assembly, and labels, is available as a replaceable
part. Rotary and sliding knobs, rotary encoders for the knobs, the trackball assembly, and the
trackball cable are all available as separate parts.
System Monitor
The monitor is an RGB, 15-in FST display monitor with a 0.28-mm, or better, RGB phosphor dot
trio pitch, an internal automatic line operated degaussing coil, 50-MHz minimum video bandwidth and 800 dots minimum per horizontal line. The monitor has an integrated microphone.
The monitor supports six different video formats. See “Monitor Specifications” on page 48 for a
summary of the system monitor technical specifications.
Three different color temperature settings are user selectable. The image presented is smaller
than a normal 15-in FST image, with only a portion of the phosphor region actively scanned.
I/O Panels
Input/output (I/O) panels (upper and lower) installed into the rear of the cart framing provide for
external system connections:
•
Upper I/O panel (see Figure 11-12):
-
A 9-pin sub-D connector serial port
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
Token Ring
Cable
Page 74
-
A 9-pin sub-D connector for the foot switch
-
A 15-pin sub-D connector for external VGA
-
A 4-pin mini circular DIN S-Video connector for analog printers
-
An RJ-45 LAN connector for network connection
-
Three female BNC connectors: one for B&W composite video, one for color composite
video, and one for print trigger output
-
A standard USB (A) for report printers
Lower I/O panel (see Figure 11-13):
-
An equipotential lug
-
The system ground lug
-
A telephone line jack
The token ring cable carries the following signals between the E-box Interface Board and the Signal Processor Board:
•
R-wave communication
•
On and off signal that switches on the outputs from the power supply (the 120-Vac output
for the PC is always on)
•
Program enable and program done (on separate circuits)
•
Ring in and ring out buses (on separate circuits)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
System Cooling
Page 75
Bottom-mounted fans provide forced-air cooling:
•
Airflow: The system fans (12 V/0.6 A) blow air through the bottom of the unit and exhaust
through the top with sufficient airflow to keep the exhaust air temperature less than +7°C
(+44.6°F) above the intake air. The exhaust cools the system electronics. The system presents a back pressure of 0.1mm H2O and requires at least 100 CFM of airflow that’s uniform
to within 10% and has a worse case temperature gradient of +10°C (+50°F).
•
Cooling: If the signal N_PWR ON is active, the fans will always be on with a minimum fan
voltage up to an external temperature of +25°C ±2°C (+77°F ±35.6°F). At higher external
temperatures, the supply will slowly vary the speed of the fans to a maximum fan voltage
when the external temperature is at +35°C ±2°C (+95°F ±35.6°F). If N_PWR ON is off, the
fans will normally be off, and if needed, only turn on at the minimum voltage to cool the PFC
and AC Regeneration.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 4-1
HD11 Service Manual
HD11 System Functional Block Diagram
Page 76
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 77
Installation: Introduction
Installation
Introduction
This section contains pre-installation and installation information for the HD11 ultrasound system. On-site installation consists of a pre-installation site check, uncrating and unpacking the system, physically installing the monitor (and VCR, color printer, or both if purchased), and verifying
that the system is configured properly. Read this section completely before starting the system
installation.
NOTE After physical installation is complete, it is necessary and important to power on the
system, to verify that it is configured properly, and to do a functional check.
Installation
Checklist
Use the following checklist to review what steps are necessary for proper system installation and
to verify that you have performed them all.
Perform a pre-installation site check (page 78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Check physical access for delivery and installation (page 78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Perform electrical and environmental checks (page 79). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Gather site network (DICOM) information (page 79). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Uncrate and unpack the system (page 80).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Inspect the system (page 81). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Assemble the system (page 82). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Install the monitor (page 82). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Install peripherals (page 82).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Install the system power cord (page 82). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 78
Installation: Inspecting the Installation Site
Start up and configure the system (page 83). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Set up the monitor (page 83). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Set the localization parameters (page 84 through page 93). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Verify system options (page 94). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Configure the DICOM/connectivity network, if required (page 97).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Configure other system settings (optional) (page 98). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Prepare the peripherals (page 98). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Perform a system functional check (page 99). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Present the system (page 100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❏
Inspecting the
Installation
Site
Conduct an inspection of the site prior to system installation to ensure a trouble-free installation
and to assist the customer in providing an environment that supports reliable performance of the
system.
Checking
Physical Access
for Delivery and
Installation
Check that the installation site is physically acceptable as follows:
•
With the customer, evaluate site access for delivery. Consider the availability of a loading
dock, elevators, ramps, and the width of passageways and doors.
•
Verify that there is adequate space available for system uncrating and installation.
•
At each location where the system will be operated, verify that there is enough space for the
system and any external peripherals.
•
Check adjacent rooms for activity and types of equipment that might negatively affect the
ultrasound system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 79
Installation: Inspecting the Installation Site
Checking
Electrical and
Environmental
Requirements
Verify that the system is to be installed and operated in a room or rooms that meet the electrical
and environmental requirements given in Section 2, “System Specifications”.
Gathering Site
Network
(DICOM)
Information
If the system DICOM feature will be used, it will be necessary to have the following connectivity
information.
NOTE If the system is to communicate over a network, the customer site network administrator must be available to supply configuration data.
The customer or their contractor shall install network cabling. If in-wall cabling is used, it is the
customer’s responsibility to install the correct type of cable in accordance with all applicable
building and fire codes. It is also the customer’s responsibility to maintain the in-wall cabling for
the life of the system.
Determine and record the following network information for later DICOM configuration:
•
Identify the system administrator (and backup person, if possible).
•
Obtain the following information from the system administrator:
-
A list of all equipment that is part of the Image Management network. Also include device
type, model number, and software version applicable to each piece of equipment.
-
Logical diagram of the network showing topology, subnets, and so forth.
-
Locations of equipment.
-
Locations of all DICOM Connectivity LAN attachment points.
-
Locations of power outlets and connector types.
-
Locations of any dedicated analog phone lines.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 80
Installation: Uncrating and Unpacking the System
-
All necessary Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and subnet information.
-
Application Entity (AE) Titles for the ultrasound system and all connected devices.
-
Port Numbers for all connected devices.
-
IP address, subnet mask, Port number, and DICOM AE Title for the HD11 system.
-
IP Address, Port number, and AE Title for each DICOM server.
•
Determine the type of network cabling installed.
•
Identify OEM equipment installers and contact them regarding the installation.
•
Check device compatibility prior to connecting new devices (such as, printers or archive
devices) to the network.
See “Configuring the DICOM Feature” on page 97.
Uncrating and
Unpacking the
System
Inspect the shipping container and uncrate the system as described in the following sections.
Inspecting the
Crate
Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system:
•
Examine the shipping crate for damage. Look for evidence that the crate was opened.
•
Verify that the Shockwatch and Tiltwatch indicators on the outside of the carton have not
been activated. If the indicators are red, report this fact to the carrier and to the Philips
Ultrasound traffic department. Be sure to check the system for damage when it is uncrated.
•
Report any damage or missing inventory to the carrier and to the Philips Ultrasound traffic
department.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 81
Installation: Inspecting the System
NOTE Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear
for at least 2.74 m (9 ft). (The ramp is the front side and is labeled “OPEN THIS
END.”)
Uncrating
Uncrate the system by following the instructions in “Uncrating the HD11 Ultrasound System”
on page 103. (Instructions for re-crating the system for shipment are provided in Section 10,
“Disassembly and Reassembly”.)
Inspecting the
System
After the system is uncrated (“Uncrating the HD11 Ultrasound System” on page 103), conduct
the following inspections. Report any damage or missing inventory to the carrier and to the
Philips Ultrasound traffic department.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages are present inside the system. Do not install the system power cord or connect it to AC line voltage until correct line voltage has been verified, a thorough inspection of the
system has been performed, and the system has been properly assembled.
➤ To inspect the system after uncrating
1. Inventory the shipment against the packing list.
2. Inspect the outside surfaces of the system, monitor, and peripherals for damage.
3. Unlatch and rotate the control panel to verify that proper left and right swivel and up/down
movement.
4. Verify that the system rolls and turns smoothly on its casters.
5. Verify that proper caster brake and swivel operation.
6. Remove the system covers.
7. Remove any loose packing material, dust, or debris from the interior of the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 82
Installation: Assembling the System
8. Check that the system filter is clean (see “Fan Air Filter” on page 264).
9. Verify that there is good continuity between the power supply and system ground.
Assembling
the System
Assemble the HD11 system by installing the following components.
Installing the
Monitor
Install the monitor by following the instructions in “To install the system monitor” on page 114.
Installing the
Printers and
VCR
If the system is ordered with a B&W printer, it will come installed in the B&W printer bay
(Figure 1-1) from the factory.
If the system is ordered with a color printer or VCR, you will need to install it on the short
peripheral mounting plate, which will come installed on the cart from the factory. Follow the
color printer or VCR installation instructions (“To install the color printer (as a single peripheral)” on page 118, or “To install the VCR (as a single peripheral)” on page 119).
If the system is ordered with a color printer and VCR, you will need to install the long peripheral
mounting plate provided as part of installing these two (dual) peripherals as described in the
installation instructions (“To install dual top-mounted peripherals” on page 120).
NOTE The peripherals come from the factory already configured with the Philips-recommended settings (refer to “Peripheral Settings” on page 342).
Installing the
System Power
Cord
After the system has been inspected and properly assembled, install the system power cord by
following the instructions in “To install the system power cord” on page 127.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Powering On
and Configuring the
System
HD11 Service Manual
Page 83
Installation: Powering On and Configuring the System
When physical installation is complete, it is necessary and important to verify that the system is
properly configured. After the system has been inspected and properly assembled as instructed
in this section, plug the system power cord into a proper AC outlet and switch the system
power on.
Basic initial configuration is addressed in the following sections. For detailed information and
instructions for configuring and operating the system, invoke the on-system Help feature (press
? Help on the soft key panel) after you have the system running.
NOTES
• The HD11 system boots to a Caps Lock = on default condition (the Caps Lock “on” indication is an (A) at the bottom right of the display; no (A) shows when Caps Lock is switched
off). This can confuse password entries if forgotten.
•
Setting Up the
Monitor
At power on, the system conducts a check of the tranducer connector modules and the TR
boards to determine if they are the correct type for the system: If one (or more) of these
boards is not the correct type for the system, an “Incompatible hardware shutdown” error
message is displayed and the system is prevented from imaging. If you encounter this error,
see “Incompatible Hardware Shutdown Error” on page 176.
The monitor signal input voltage must be set to 0.7 V. Verify the monitor signal input voltage by
following the instructions in “To verify the monitor signal input voltage setting” on page 162.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Verifying the
User Interface
Language
HD11 Service Manual
Page 84
➤ To check or set the user interface language
1. Press Setup.
The Setup window opens (Figure 5-1).
2. In the Setup window, click the Locale button.
The Regional and Languages Options window opens (Figure 5-2).
3. Click the list in the Standards and formats section and select the configuration in the list
that most nearly matches the site locale.
4. If the number, currency, time, or date formats in the selected configuration set do not match
the site locale, click the Customize button and change the incorrect settings.
NOTES
• Customizing the date format to one that is longer than any in the list may cause dates in the
display to be truncated.
•
The language in which the Help is displayed is determined by the locale selected in Standards
and formats section (step 3), if that language is available. If the selected language is not available, Help is displayed in the same language as the rest of the system.
5. Click the Location list, and select the location that most nearly matches the site.
6. In the Regional and Languages Options window, click the Languages tab (Figure 5-3).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-1
HD11 Service Manual
Setup Window
Page 85
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 86
Regional and Languages Options Window (Regional Options)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 87
Regional and Languages Options Window (Languages)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 88
7. Click the Language used in menus and dialogs menu, and select the local language.
Choose from the following languages only.
-
English
-
French
-
German
-
Spanish
-
Italian
-
Chinese (simplified or PRC)
-
Japanese
-
Russian
NOTE When the Standards and formats language is set to Japanese, the Patient ID screen
allows three name representations: Roman, phonetic, and ideographic. The Roman representation is required and accepts ISO-8859-1 characters. The phonetic representation is intended for Kana and the ideographic representation is intended for Kanji. All
representations appear in reports.
Verifying the
Input Language
➤ To check or set the input language
1. In the Regional and Languages Options window (Figure 5-3), click Details.
The Test Services and Input Languages window opens (Figure 5-4).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-4
HD11 Service Manual
Page 89
Text Services and Input Languages Window
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 90
2. In the Installed services section, add or remove input languages.
If the customer’s language...
Then install the...
is represented on the United
States-International keyboard
English (United States)-US keyboard only.
is not represented on the United
States-International keyboard
Set the default input language to English (United
States).
English (United States)-US keyboard and the
customer-requested input language.
Set the default input language to the
customer-requested language.
3. To modify the input language features, highlight the keyboard icon and click the
Properties button.
4. Click OK when you are finished.
Verifying the
System
Language
Unicode
➤ To check or set the system language unicode
1. In the Regional and Languages Options window (Figure 5-3), click the Advanced tab.
The (Advanced) Regional and Languages Options Window window opens (Figure 5-5).
2. Click the Language for non-Unicode programs list and select the language. The selection
should be the one that most closely matches the chosen interface language.
3. Click OK to close the Regional and Languages Options window.
NOTE After any change to settings in the Regional and Language Options window, reboot the
system. You may be prompted to restart or to “use existing files.” Click Yes in either
case.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 91
Regional and Languages Options Window (Advanced)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Setting the
Institution
Name
HD11 Service Manual
Page 92
➤ To check or set the institution name
1. Press Setup.
2. Click the System tab.
3. Click the Border and Prompts button.
The Border and Prompts window opens (Figure 5-6).
4. Type the institution name, and click OK.
Figure 5-6
Border and Prompts Window
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Setting the Date
and Time
Page 93
➤ To set the system date and time
1. On the Setup window, click the Date/Time button.
The Date and Time Properties window opens (Figure 5-7).
2. Click the Time Zone tab.
3. Click the list and select the local time zone.
4. Click the Date & Time tab.
5. Change the settings to the local date and time, and click OK.
Figure 5-7
Date and Time Properties Window
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Verifying the
System Options
Page 94
The system leaves the factory with all purchased options enabled. Verify that the options enabled
are the options that the customer ordered.
You must have the correct authorization code to enable system options in the field.
➤ To verify or enable system software options
1. Press Setup.
2. Click the Options tab (Figure 5-8).
3. Click Options to open the system options view, install, and remove tool (Figure 5-9).
NOTE Information about the system is provided in the banner of the tool window. It is necessary to have the system serial number when requesting option authorization codes.
4. To install or remove an option, select the item from the Application column and click Install,
Install From File, or Remove and respond to the prompt.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-8
HD11 Service Manual
Setup Window (Options)
Page 95
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 5-9
HD11 Service Manual
Page 96
System Options View/Install/Remove Window
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Configuring the
DICOM Feature
Page 97
If the system you are installing has the DICOM option, you or the customer will need to configure the system DICOM feature. Since configuring the system for DICOM operation requires
information from the customer network administrator (see “Gathering Site Network (DICOM)
Information” on page 79), Philips recommends that you work with the customer to configure the
DICOM feature. The steps required to configure the system for DICOM communications over a
network are basically as follows:
➤ To set or change DICOM parameters
1. Enter HD11 System DICOM Settings.
2. Enter Server Information and Assign Servers to Roles.
3. Set Up Automatic Export, Printing, Study Deletion, and Modality Worklist.
NOTE You must first set the system date, time, and time zone before configuring a DICOM
Modality Worklist Server. If you enable the Modality Worklist Server and then change
the system time, the patient list may not update properly.
For detailed information and instructions for configuring the DICOM feature, press ? Help on
the soft key panel after you have the system running and select “DICOM Setup” from the Help
contents. With the customer, follow the respective instructions in Help to configure the system
for DICOM operation.
This is a good time to verify that, in the DICOM Diagnostics window under System Log, the system error logging level is set to Error Level Logging.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 98
Installation: Preparing the Peripherals
NOTE When entering the number of pixels for DICOM printers (see Help topic: “Configuring
a New DICOM Printer”) and using the printer catalog, remember that the catalog contains incorrect data for some of the printers. After entering the “Resolution” value
from the spreadsheet and checking Derive number of pixels from Film Size and
Resolution, note the values provided in the X and Y boxes and compare them to the
X and Y values in the spreadsheet. If the values are within 10% of each other, then
deselect the check box, and enter the X and Y values from the spreadsheet.
Configuring
Other System
Settings
If appropriate for this installation, work with the customer and follow the respective instructions
in Help to initially configure the system settings not yet set to the customer’s preference.
➤ To configure other system settings
1. Press ? Help on the soft key panel after you have the system running and click the Contents
tab and then “Customizing Your System.”
2. Select “System Settings” from the Help contents.
Preparing the
Peripherals
As applies, correctly load paper and ribbon in the printers and insert a tape cassette in the VCR.
Follow the respective instructions in Help to check or initially configure the system setups for
the peripheral devices. Press ? Help on the soft key panel after you have the system running and
select “HD11 System Overview” and then “Peripheral Devices” from the Help contents.
The system is configured at the factory for NTSC format. To reconfigure the system for PAL format, complete the following steps:
➤ To configure the system for PAL format
1. In the Setup window, click the Peripherals tab.
2. Click Install Software Drivers. The Install Software Drivers window opens.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 99
Installation: Checking System Functionality
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Video Installation.
Click OK.
Select PAL.
Click OK. The driver is reinstalled with the correct configuration. This takes about 20 seconds.
7. Click Close to close the Setup window. The new setting takes effect after the system is
restarted.
NOTE Printer and VCR settings can be checked as described in “Peripheral Settings” on
page 342.
Checking
System
Functionality
Table 6-1, Table 6-2, and Table 6-3 describe what tests need to be performed following installation. The goal is to verify basic system functionality. If system testing reveals any problems, troubleshoot, repair, and retest the system before presenting it to the customer. Throughout these
checks, continue to verify the following general observations:
•
The image is correctly placed on the video display.
•
The indicators and backlighting associated with the controls on the control panel indicate
correctly.
•
The moveable controls operate smoothly and efficiently.
•
The system responds correctly to all controls.
•
The image printers, if installed, make a print of the system screen. Also verify that the print
images are spatially correct horizontally and vertically and that they contain all the information being displayed on the system monitor.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Presenting the
System
Page 100
Installation: Presenting the System
•
The VCR, if installed, records and plays back and that the video and audio is clear, properly
oriented, and stable.
•
The report printer, if installed, prints and that all report information is present and legible.
When the system is ready, present it to the operators:
•
Review the customer order with the customer to familiarize them with the system as purchased and its options.
•
Present the user information, including the user Help, and operating notes. Guide the operators through this information, demonstrating that the knowledge needed to operate the system and peripherals is there.
•
Show the operators how to turn the system and any external peripherals on and off. Explain
the importance of letting the system shut down completely before disconnecting the power
cord.
•
Explain the importance of cycling the power at least once a week on systems that are left on
permanently. (As the user presses buttons and different parts of the software are used, different segments of “virtual memory” are acquired and released. Virtual memory is handled
on the hard disk drive and as it is used and released, it is subject to fragmentation. After a
while, the virtual memory area can become fragmented into small pieces, so that there is no
longer a large enough “chunk” for the system to do what is needed. If this happens, the system will crash.)
•
Instruct the customer how to back up and restore presets. Make a backup disk of the customer’s presets and configurations, and store it where service staff and the customer can find
it readily.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 101
Installation: Presenting the System
•
Demonstrate how to clean the air filter and explain the importance of a clean filter to
system performance.
•
Explain why it is important for them to never remove covers from the system because of
ESD and warranty considerations.
•
If the system is connected to a DICOM network, show the customer the Job Manager.
Explain that the user should check the Job Manager at the end of each day and that an empty
queue indicates that all studies have been successfully transferred to the DICOM PACS.
•
Review with the customer, procedures for placing service calls or calling for technical
assistance.
NOTE These are shortcut control key functions you may want to note and share with the customer (those that are found in Help under “Using the Control Panel”): Press Ctrl+b to
change the backlight level; press Ctrl+j to go to the DICOM Job Manager; press
Ctrl+q to cycle through the Autotrace Evaluation settings; press Ctrl+u to add a
user-mark to the event log; and press Ctrl+Alt+s to enter simulation mode (only during power-up).
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 102
Installation: Physical Installation Procedures
Physical Installation Procedures
Figure 5-10
Installation Procedure List
Single Peripheral
(VCR)
Uncrating the HD11
Ultrasound System
Dual Peripherals
Monitor
System Power Cord
Single Peripheral
(Color Printer)
NOTE
The numbers in the installation illustrations correspond
to the steps in the installation procedure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 103
Uncrating the HD11 Ultrasound System
Figure 5-11
Cutting the Plastic Banding
Plastic strapping bands
➤ To uncrate the HD11 Ultrasound System
.
NOTES
• Instructions for re-crating the system
for shipment are provided in
Section 10, “Disassembly and Reassembly”.
•
Estimated time to uncrate the system is 10 minutes.
1. Remove (cut) the two plastic strapping bands from around the corrugate container. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-12
HD11 Service Manual
Page 104
Removing the Corrugated Top Cover
2. Remove the top cover from the corrugate crate. Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-13
HD11 Service Manual
Page 105
Removing the Foam Cap
3. Remove the foam cap from the top
of the system. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-14
HD11 Service Manual
Page 106
Removing One of the Corrugated Wraps
4. To remove the corrugated wraps,
first cut the tape on the two seams
of the corrugated wraps.
NOTE Look for the label that says,
“OPEN THIS SIDE.”
5. Remove one of the corrugated wrap
halves. Proceed to step 6.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 107
Removing the Second Corrugated Wrap
6. Remove the other corrugated wrap
half.
7. Remove all the accessory items from
around the system. Proceed to
step 8.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-16
HD11 Service Manual
Page 108
Removing the Hold-down Brace Bolts
8. Remove the two 9/16-inch bolts
securing the hold-down brace to the
top-side of the ramp. Proceed to
step 9.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-17
HD11 Service Manual
Page 109
Removing the Ramp Bolts
9. Remove the two 9/16-inch bolts
securing the ramp to the pallet. Proceed to step 10.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-18
HD11 Service Manual
Page 110
Placing the Ramp
10. Lift the ramp off the pallet.
11. Turn the ramp around and place the
ramp in front of the system with the
beveled edge facing up. Proceed to
step 12.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-19
HD11 Service Manual
Page 111
Removing the System Hold-down Brace
12. Remove the hold-down brace from
under the control panel. Proceed to
step 13.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-20
HD11 Service Manual
Page 112
Removing the Wheel Chock
13. Remove the wheel chock from the
open (ramp side) of the crate. Proceed to step 14.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-21
HD11 Service Manual
Page 113
Rolling the System Off the Pallet
14. Lift the antistatic cover and position
yourself on the pallet in front of the
ultrasound system.
15. Carefully pull the system down the
ramp and onto the floor.
16. Inspect the system as described in
“Inspecting the System” on page 81.
17. Dispose of the crate and packing
materials properly.
NOTE Do NOT return the crate or
packing materials to Philips.
This completes the uncrating procedure.
Return to Installation Procedure List.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 114
Monitor
Figure 5-22
Removing the Cable Connection Access
Panel
➤ To install the system monitor
NOTE This procedure may require
two people for installation
2
1
1. Remove the monitor from the shipping container.
2. Remove the cable connection access
panel. Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-23
HD11 Service Manual
Page 115
Attaching the Monitor to the Monitor Base
Monitor base edge
3. Starting from the front of the system,
slide the monitor onto the monitor
base. Line up the slots of the monitor bracket with the edges of the
monitor base.
4. Push the monitor until it locks
(clicks) in place on the base. Proceed
to step 5.
3
4
Monitor bracket
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-24
HD11 Service Manual
Page 116
Connecting the Monitor Cables
Power cord receptacle
6
5. Connect the microphone cable to
the microphone connector.
6. Connect the monitor power cord to
the power receptacle.
7. Connect the video cable to the VGA
connector. Proceed to step 8.
5
Microphone connector
7
Video (VGA)
connector
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-25
HD11 Service Manual
Page 117
Replacing the Cable Connection Access Panel
8
8. Replace the cable connection access
panel by lining up the three tabs with
the slots and pressing the panel into
place. You are done installing the
monitor.
NOTE You are required to set up the
monitor when you power the
system on for the first time
(see “Setting Up the Monitor”
on page 83).
This completes the system monitor
installation procedure.
Access panel tabs
8
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 118
Single Peripheral (Color Printer)
Figure 5-26
Color Printer Installation
➤ To install the color printer (as a
single peripheral)
Refer to “Dual Peripherals” on page 120
for installation of the color printer with a
VCR.
1
4
1. Open the straps on the short peripheral mounting plate that comes
installed from the factory.
3
2
2. Strap the color printer to the
mounting plate, tighten the straps,
and secure the straps with the Velcro
end.
3. Connect the system color printer
cables in accordance with the color
printer cabling diagram (Figure 11-6).
Dress the unused cables.
4. If there is a peripheral cover
(garage), snap it into place over the
printer.
This completes the printer procedure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 119
Single Peripheral (VCR)
Figure 5-27
VCR Installation
➤ To install the VCR (as a single
peripheral)
Refer to “Dual Peripherals” on page 120
for installation of the VCR with a color
printer.
1
4
3
1. Open the straps on the short peripheral mounting plate that comes
installed from the factory.
2
2. Strap the VCR to the mounting
plate, tighten the straps, and secure
the straps with the Velcro end.
3. Connect the system VCR cables in
accordance with the VCR cabling
diagram (Figure 11-4). Dress the
unused cables.
4. If there is a peripheral cover
(garage), snap it into place over the
VCR.
This completes the VCR procedure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 120
Dual Peripherals
Figure 5-28
Removing the Top Hatch
1
Flathead
screws
(4 plcs)
➤ To install dual top-mounted
peripherals
NOTE Review “Installing the Printers
and VCR” on page 82.
1. Remove the four flathead screws
securing the top hatch to the top
cover.
Top hatch
2
2. Pull the system-to-VCR and system-to-color printer cables out of
the hatch opening and drape them
off to the side. Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-29
HD11 Service Manual
Page 121
Installing the Peripheral Mounting Plate
Bracket
4
Panhead
screws
(6 plcs)
Peripheral
mounting
plate bracket
3
3
3.
Place the peripheral mounting plate
bracket in the top cover opening and
arrange the cables so they fit through
the bracket openings.
4. Secure the peripheral mounting plate
bracket, using six panhead screws
with washers. Tighten the screws.
Proceed to step 5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-30
HD11 Service Manual
Page 122
Installing the Dual Mounting Plate Power
Cord Hanger Hooks
Dual peripheral mounting plate
Rear of system
5
Panhead screws (4 plcs)
5
5. Install the two power cord hanger
hooks (hardware supplied with the
dual mounting plate) to the bottom
rear side of the dual mounting plate.
Secure the hooks with the four panhead screws supplied. Proceed to
step 6.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 5-31
Page 123
Installing the Strapping on the Dual Mounting
Plate
6
Straps (2 per device)
Plate strap slot
Color
printer
7
6. Thread the VCR and color printer
straps through the appropriate slots
in the dual peripheral mounting
plate.
VCR
Cable slot (4 plcs)
Rear of system
Dual peripheral mounting plate
NOTE The peripherals can be
mounted facing either side of
the system depending on the
user’s preference. The VCR
always mounts on the rear section of the dual peripheral
mounting plate.
7. Temporarily loop the straps and
secure with the Velcro end until the
dual peripheral mounting plate is
secured in place. Proceed to step 8.
NOTE These steps are also valid for
the single (small) peripheral
mounting plate installation.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-32
HD11 Service Manual
Page 124
Installing the Dual Peripheral Mounting Plate
10
9
8
Panhead
screws
(4 plcs)
8. Set the dual peripheral mounting
plate on the peripheral mounting
plate bracket.
9. Feed the peripheral cables through
the mounting plate (rectangular)
slots.
10. Secure the mounting plate with four
panhead screws and washers. Proceed to step 11.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
Figure 5-33
HD11 Service Manual
Page 125
Installing the Dual Peripherals
11. Open the straps and place the VCR
and color printer in position on the
peripheral mounting plate.
12
VCR
11
11
Color printer
12. Tighten the straps to hold the
peripherals, securing the straps with
the Velcro end.
13. Connect the system VCR and color
printer cables in accordance with the
cabling diagrams (Figure 11-4 and
Figure 11-6). Proceed to step 14.
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 5-34
Page 126
Installing the Peripheral Covers (Garages)
15
Tab (4 plcs)
14. Place the garages over the peripherals.
15. Line up the holes on the plate with
the tabs on the bottom of each
garage.
16
14
14
16. Gently press down on all four corners of the garage to snap it into
place.
This completes the dual peripheral
mounting plate installation procedure.
15
Hole (4 plcs)
System not shown for clarity
4535 612 10261
CSIP: Level 2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 127
System Power Cord
Figure 5-35
Connecting the System Power Cord
➤ To install the system power cord
1. Insert the system power cord that
came supplied with the system into
the receptacle located at the rear of
the power supply.
2. Press down on the cable retainer clip
until it snaps onto the power cord,
using your thumb to support the
bottom of the power cord.
2
3. Connect the power cord to the AC
supply source.
This completes the system power cord
installation procedure.
Cable retainer clip
1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
6
HD11 Service Manual
Page 128
Performance Tests: Introduction
Performance Tests
Introduction
This section includes all test procedures for diagnosing problems with the system and assuring its
safe and accurate operation.
The following subjects are in this section:
Test and
Inspection
Matrices
•
“Test and Inspection Matrices” on page 128
•
“Electrical Safety Tests” on page 143
•
“PC Diagnostics” on page 159
The following tables indicate the tests that need to be performed on the ultrasound system
under various conditions.
•
Table 6-1 describes what tests need to be performed following preventative maintenance
(PM) tasks, installations, and repairs.
•
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 tell when the test blocks identified in Table 6-1 should be performed.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 129
Performance Tests: Test and Inspection Matrices
HD11 System Test and Inspection Matrix
Test or Inspection to Perform
Sv:
Expected Test Results
Inspect the system controls, cables, power Answer to question is “yes.”
(System Visual cord, transducer cables, lenses and controls,
and system and transducer's physical
Inspection)
condition. Are all of the above free from
physical damage that could make the
equipment unsafe?
Sgc:
Measure the resistance between the ground < 200 milliOhms
(System Ground pin on the system power cord and the
system chassis ground.
Continuity)
S:
Measure with safety analyzer:
(System or
(w) Case (ground wire) leakage current
Stand-alone
(normal condition)
Peripheral
(x) Case (chassis) ground resistance
Safety)
What to Record on
Service Record
Sv:P
or
Sv(sn):F
(sn = last 5 digits of
serial number,
P= Pass and F = Fail)
Sgc:P/x
or
Sgc(sn):F/x
(x = ohms measured,
and sn = last 5 digits of
serial number,
w = < 300 a (UL—USA only), S:P/w/x/y/z
or
or
< 500 μA (IEC/CSA)
S:F/w/x/y/z
x = < 200 mOhms (UL/IEC/ (P = Pass, F = Fail, and
w, x, y, z = uA or
CSA)
mOhms measured)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 130
HD11 System Test and Inspection Matrix (Continued)
y = < 50 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
x = < 50 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
(y) ECG Leads leakage isolation current,
If test was within the above
sink (mains voltage applied)
limits, the system passes, and
(z) ECG Leads leakage current, source
you record the test data.
(single fault)
See NOTE on page 137.
Measure the leakage current of the
< 80% of system case leakage
transducer, using the test setup described in current (test result “w” from
“Electrical Safety Tests” on page 143.
the S test)
If ECG module is installed then do:
Ste:
(Safety—TEE
and Endocavity
Transducers)
If transducer is within the
above limits, the Transducer
passes, and you record test
data.
What to Record on
Service Record
NOTE: It is not necessary
to record the units of measure, only the numerical
data.
Ste(sn):P/x
or
Ste(sn):F/x
(x = μA measured and
sn = last 5 digits of
serial number,
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
Sep:
Safety—
Epiaortic
Transducer/
Interoperative
Measure the leakage current of the CF
transducer using test setup described in
(x) Leakage current, source (single fault)
(y) Leakage current, sink (mains voltage
(CF Type)
applied)
Ti:
Are transducer and lens free from cuts, or
other physical damage?
(All models of
imaging
transducers)
Page 131
(x) < 50 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
(y) < 50 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
If transducer is within the
above limits, the transducer
or PIU passes, and you
record test data.
Answer to question is “yes.”
(If so, perform the next
inspection.)
(See “Important Condition:”
on page 133.)
What to Record on
Service Record
Sep(sn):P/x/y
or
Sep(sn):F/x/y
(x and y = μA
measured, sn = last 5
digits of serial number,
P= Pass and F= Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Activate the transducer. Is the transducer
recognized by the system (its ID label
appears on the screen) and does it image?
NOTE: Turn the gain up to ensure that the
transducer will image. Dip the transducer
tip in water and verify that there is an image
throughout the sector.
Sbf:
Safety—
Transthoracic
Transducer
(BF Type)
Page 132
Only perform this test if, during the Ti or
Tn test, minor damage to a transthoracic
“BF” transducer indicates the need to verify
electrical integrity.
Measure the leakage current of the
transducer using test setup described in
(x) Leakage current, source (single fault)
(y) Leakage current, sink (mains voltage
applied)
If all answers were “yes,” the
transducer passes.
Important Condition:
Perform the Sbf test if a
transthoracic “BF” transducer passes
all of the above tests, yet has minor
physical damage which normally does
not result in transducer replacement,
but does warrant verifying electrical
integrity. Ti will still be Pass (from a
physical perspective). Passing or failure
of the electrical integrity test is
indicated in the Sbf test results.
(x)< 500 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
(y)< 250 μA (UL/IEC/CSA)
If transducer is within above
limits, the transducer passes,
and you record test data.
What to Record on
Service Record
Ti:P
or
Ti:F
(“sn” is the last 5 digits of
the serial number of the
transducer that failed, and
P = Pass and F=Fail)
Sbf(sn):P/x/y
or
Sbf(sn):F/x/y
(x and y = uA
measured, sn = last 5
digits of serial number,
P = Pass and F = Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
Tn:
(all models of
nonimaging
transducers)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 133
What to Record on
Service Record
Are Transducer and lens free from cuts or
other physical damage?
(If so, perform next
inspection.)
(See “Important Condition:”
on page 133.)
Activate the transducer; is the transducer Answer to question is “yes.”
recognized by the system (its ID label is on (If so, perform next
the screen)?
inspection.)
Does the spectrum move up and down with Answer to question is “yes.” Tn:P
finger movement toward and away from
If all answers were “yes,” the or
transducer?
transducer passes.
Tn(sn):F
Important Condition:
Perform the Sbf test if a
transthoracic “BF” transducer passes
all of the above tests, yet has minor
physical damage which normally does
not result in transducer replacement,
but does warrant verifying electrical
integrity. Ti will still be Pass (from a
physical perspective). Passing or failure
of the electrical integrity test is
indicated in the Sbf test results.
(“sn” is the last 5 digits of
the serial number of the
transducer that failed, and
P = Pass and F = Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
P:
(Printers, all
models)
V:
(VCRs, all
models)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 134
What to Record on
Service Record
Using the system controls, make a test print Answer to question is “yes.”
of the initial imaging screen:
Compare the print to the screen. Does all inspection.)
of the information presented on the screen
and print match?
Are the printout characters in focus?
inspection.)
Do all of the printer controls operate as
intended?
inspection.)
Inspect the printout. Is it free from
scratches, missing pixels, lines, indications of If all answers are “yes,” the
noise, or any other disfigurement that
printer passes.
would alter the image?
On the ultrasound system, tape at least
30 seconds of any live color image and
30 seconds of any black-and-white image
with Audio:
P:P
or
P:F
(P = Pass and F = Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 135
inspection.)
inspection.)
inspection.)
Do all of the VCR control functions operate Answer to question is “yes.”
properly? (Start/Stop/FF/Rew/Reset/Search, (If so, perform next
and so on)
inspection).
Can playback audio be heard on speakers? Answer to question is “yes.”
If all answers were yes, the
VCR passes.
What to Record on
Service Record
Did all of the information that was showing
on the system screen record on the video
tape?
During playback, was the image in focus and
easy to view without distortion (no excess
snow, jitter, or noise)?
Were all of the colors in playback shown on
the color bar?
Xp:
(PC)
When the system is powered on, did the
system arrive at initial imaging screen
without reporting errors?
inspection.)
V:P
or
V:F
(P = Pass and F = Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Do all of the devices in, or connected to,
the PC work as intended?
(keyboard, trackball, CD, MOD)
X:
(software)
C:
(Cart: power
cord, wheels,
cart, keyboard,
monitor)
Page 136
If answer to this and previous
question is “yes,” PC test
passes.
If answer to question is “yes,”
software test passes.
In the Setup window, click the Options
tab. Then click Options and view the
Software Revision number in the title bar of
the dialog box. Is the software revision
number correct?
Are the power cord and on/off switch in
good physical condition and working
properly?
inspection.)
What to Record on
Service Record
Xp:P
or
Xp:F
(P=Pass and F = Fail)
X:P
or
X:F
(P=Pass and F = Fail)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 6-1
Test Block
Name
(or Symbol)
HD11 Service Manual
Page 137
Are all active components—the wheels,
brakes, rear door, peripheral strap, monitor
swivel, and keyboard up/down/swivel
working as intended?
Do all of the user interface controls work as
intended?
(keyboard, trackball, panel light, monitor
controls, and speakers)
If both answers are yes, the
cart passes.
(if so, perform the next
inspection)
What to Record on
Service Record
C:P
or
C:F
(P = Pass, and F=Fail)
NOTE A test can fail. If this happens, correct the problem, and retest. If test passes, put “P” or
“Pass” on the service record. If the test still fails, then indicate “F” or “Fail” (include the
last 5 digits of the serial number of the device that failed if the test results box indicates
a serial number is needed). If the problem cannot be fixed, or if the customer refuses a
repair, explain in the comments section of the service record why the product was still
in the Fail condition at the end of the service event.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-2
Test Name
Safety—Visual
Inspection
Safety—Ground
Continuity
Safety—System
Safety—TEE and
Endocavity
Safety-Epiaortic/
Interoperative (CF)
Imaging Transducers
Safety—
Transthoracic (BF)
Non-Imaging
Transducers
Printers
VCRs
PC
Page 138
When to Perform Tests—Summary
Test Code
(Table 6-1)
PM Tasks
Install/
Upgrade
Other
Service
Events
Sv:P
Yes
Yes
See Table 6-3.
Sgc(sn):P/x
No
Yes
See Table 6-3.
S:P/w/x/y/z
Yes
No
See Table 6-3.
Ste(sn):P/x
Yes
No
See Table 6-3.
Sep(sn):P/x/y Yes
No
See Table 6-3.
Ti:P
Yes
Yes
Sbf(sn):P/x/y See
No
Comments
column
Tn:P
Yes
Yes
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-3.
P:P
V:P
Xp:P
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-3.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
See Table 6-3.
Comments
Not required on software-only
upgrades.
Not required on software-only
upgrades.
Not required on installations and
upgrades.
Test only if visual inspection
results in questionable electrical
integrity.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-2
Page 139
When to Perform Tests—Summary (Continued)
Test Name
Test Code
(Table 6-1)
PM Tasks
Install/
Upgrade
Other
Service
Events
Software
E-box
Cart
X:P
E:P
C:P
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-3.
Table 6-3
Comments
Run only after loading software.
When to Perform Tests—Details
Test Block Name
(Symbol)
After an
After a Installation
PM Task or Upgrade Other Situations Requiring Testing
Sv:
Yes
Yes
(System Visual Inspection)
Sgc:
No
In any situation where the service engineer or customer suspects
that the system or transducers may have sustained physical damage.
Yes
•
(System Ground
Continuity)
•
Whenever a component was changed that is part of the main
power circuitry:
-
Power cord
-
Power supply
-
Power cable from rear of cart to power supply
In any situation where the CE (or customer) suspects that the
electrical safety of the system may have been compromised.
NOTE: System Ground Continuity is not required after
software-only installations or upgrades.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-3
Page 140
When to Perform Tests—Details (Continued)
Test Block Name
(Symbol)
After an
S:
Yes
No
(Safety—System or
Stand-alone Peripherals)
•
In any situation where the CE (or customer) suspects that the
electrical safety of the system may have been compromised.
•
Whenever the ECG/Physio board is changed.
•
Ste:
System Safety not required after software-only installation or
upgrades.
In any situation where the CE suspects that the electrical safety of
the transducer may have been compromised.
Yes
No
and Endocavity
Transducers)
Sep:
Yes
No
(Safety—Epiaortic/
Interoperative
Transducers—CF Type)
Ti:
Yes
Yes
Whenever just the imaging transducer has been serviced.
See NOTE on
page 142.
(Safety—TEE
(Imaging Transducers)
In any situation where the CE suspects that the electrical safety of
the transducer may have been compromised.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-3
Test Block Name
(Symbol)
Sbf:
(Safety—Transthoracic
BF type transducers)
Tn:
(Non-Imaging
Transducers)
P:
(Printers)
Page 141
After an
(See the No
Other
Situations
Requiring
Testing
column)
Yes
Yes
See NOTE on
page 142.
Yes
Yes
V:
(VCRs)
Yes
Xp:
(PC)
Yes
X:
(Software)
No
Yes
This test is only performed if, during the visual inspection of a
transthoracic “BF” type transducer, a physical defect is noted that
could compromise the electrical integrity of the transducer.
For example: A small crack or hole in the lens or body of the
transducer is present.
Whenever just the nonimaging transducer has been serviced.
•
Whenever any system or stand-alone printer has been serviced.
•
Whenever any circuitry or cables that control or send signals to a
printer have been serviced.
Whenever any system or stand-alone VCR has been serviced.
•
•
Yes
Yes
•
Whenever any circuitry or cables that control signals to a VCR
have been serviced.
Whenever the PC or any of its components has been serviced.
• Whenever any cables connected to the PC have been serviced.
This test is performed during an installation or a repair service only if
system software was loaded. This test ensures that you have loaded
the correct software version.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 6-3
Test Block Name
(Symbol)
E:
(E-box, Power Supply)
C:
(Cart)
Page 142
After an
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
•
Whenever any component in the E-box or the power supply has
been serviced.
•
Whenever any cable attached to the E-box or the power supply
has been serviced.
•
During preventive maintenance or if configuration is lost, test the
battery.
Whenever any part on the cart has been serviced (a part that is
not a part of one of the other test blocks).
•
For example: When the power cord, wheels, cart, keyboard,
monitor, rear door, monitor twivel, or the side panels are serviced.
NOTE: Stand-alone, nonimaging and imaging transducers that are
sent to a customer by themselves (not with a system), do not require
installation and therefore do not require this test.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Electrical
Safety Tests
HD11 Service Manual
Page 143
Performance Tests: Electrical Safety Tests
The tests described on the following pages are part of a comprehensive preventive maintenance
program. They detect abnormalities that could prove dangerous to patient or operator.
NOTES
• The system power supply is a self-contained unit that is safety-tested by its manufacturer. No
further safety testing is needed when the power supply is installed or replaced.
•
After any service or maintenance, perform the required tests to assure that system safety
and functions are not compromised.
•
Inspect power cords frequently, especially at their ends.
This section describes the following safety tests:
•
The Chassis to Ground Resistance test checks the entire system for electrical resistance
between the chassis and ground. See “Chassis to Ground Resistance Test” on page 144.
•
The Ground Wire Leakage Current test checks the entire system for leakage on ground
leads. See “Ground Wire Leakage Current Test” on page 146.
•
The ECG Lead Leakage Current test checks ECG leads connected to the optional Physio
module for electrical leakage. See “ECG Lead Leakage Current Test (Source)” on page 148.
•
The ECG Lead Isolation Leakage test checks ECG leads by applying voltage from the mains to
the leads, to assure that the system is isolated from such voltages. See “ECG Lead Isolation
Leakage Current Test” on page 150.
•
The Transducer Leakage Current test checks a transducer for electrical leakage while it is
connected to the ultrasound system. The system sends normal operating voltages to the
transducer, which is tested for leakage. See “To test transducer leakage current” on
page 154.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
Page 144
The Transducer Isolation Leakage Current test applies mains voltage to the leads to check a
transducer for electrical leakage. See “Transducer Isolation Leakage Current Test” on
page 156.
All tests can be performed using commercially available safety analyzer test equipment. Basic
measurements can be performed with multifunction instruments like the HP 3469A multimeter.
NOTE These procedures require a safety analyzer. Routinely use a safety analyzer as a final
step in any repair or upgrade, to maintain agency approved status. The safety analyzer is
also useful in detecting abnormalities of line voltage, grounding, and total current loads.
Follow the instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.
The limits referenced in these tests are prescribed by UL, CSA, and IEC. Local regulations may
require additional tests.
Chassis to
Ground
Resistance Test
This test checks the entire system for electrical resistance between the chassis and ground.
Figure 6-1 on page 145 shows the basic electrical concept of the ground resistance test. Use a
safety analyzer and complete the procedure that follows the figure.
WARNING
Some users routinely perform a safety-earth or ground-bonding test at currents in excess of
10 A. Test currents in excess of 1 A will likely exceed the impedance limit specification, and can
damage the RFI protection finger contacts. Exposed metal on the transducer assembly, including
the connector, are for RFI and are not safety grounds.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 145
Chassis to Ground Resistance Test Diagram
Power cord disconnected from AC power.
Hot -
System
under
test
Neutral -
Ground wire
Green or
Green/Yellow
Chassis
ground
R
(resistance)
300e036
LIMIT: UL, CSA and IEC:R = 200 milliohms maximum
Chassis-to-Ground Resistance Test Procedure
➤ To test the system for resistance between chassis and ground
1. Inspect the power cord for cracks and wear.
2. Set the mode on the analyzer to measure resistance in the power cord.
3. Plug the analyzer into an available AC wall outlet. Plug the ultrasound system power plug into
the test receptacle on the analyzer.
4. Make the appropriate connections between the analyzer and the ground lug on the ultrasound system’s I/O panel.
5. Read chassis ground resistance in milliohms. Flex the ultrasound power cord during the test
to detect intermittent changes in resistance value.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 146
6. Record the highest resistance value measured in step 5. Check that the highest resistance
value is within the limit specified in Figure 6-1 on page 145.
NOTE If the reading exceeds the specified limit, check the power cord and the associated primary wiring.
A comprehensive ground impedance measurement can be performed using the safety analyzer.
The impedance test drives a load current through the ground wire while measuring the AC voltage drop across the entire length of the power cord and to the system chassis. The reading will
be in milliohms.
Ground Wire
Leakage
Current Test
This test checks the entire system for leakage on chassis ground wires. Figure 6-2 on page 147
shows the basic electrical concept of the test. Use a safety analyzer and complete the procedure
that follows the figure.
CAUTION
If the safety analyzer is used for an extended period, it may be damaged by the high current draw
of the system.
WARNING
This test can be hazardous. Avoid any contact with line voltage. Any time during the test that the
ground connection is open, do not touch the chassis or the patient cable.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 147
Ground Wire Leakage Current Test Diagram
Power cord connected to AC power.
Hot -
System
under
test
(open neutral)
Neutral -
Powered on
(open ground)
Ground wire
Green or
Green/Yellow
LIMITS:
AC microammeter
I
(current)
Ground wire open for Normal condition
Ground wire and neutral wire open
simultaneously for Single Fault condition
UL: I = 300 microamperes Normal condition,
1000 microamperes Single Fault condition
CSA and IEC: I = 500 microamperes Normal condition,
7ASW025
Ground Wire Leakage Current Test Procedure
➤ To test the system’s ground wiring for leakage
1. Set the mode on the analyzer to detect leakage.
2. Plug the analyzer into an available wall outlet. Plug the ultrasound system power plug into the
test receptacle on the analyzer. Turn on the ultrasound system’s power by starting the internal PC.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 148
3. Take ground wire leakage current measurements in an open ground condition, with both
normal and reverse polarity. Record the highest value, and compare it to the limit specified
for Normal condition in Figure 6-2 on page 147.
4. Take ground wire leakage current measurements in an open ground and open neutral condition, with both normal and reverse polarity. Record the highest value, and compare it to the
limit specified for Single Fault condition in Figure 6-2 on page 147.
A reading higher than acceptable limits can indicate a problem with the power cord, with its
associated connections, or with the power transformer.
ECG Lead
Leakage
Current Test
(Source)
This test checks ECG leads connected to the optional Physio module for electrical leakage.
Figure 6-3 on page 149 shows the basic electrical concept of the ECG Lead Leakage Current
test. Use a safety analyzer and complete the procedure that follows the figure.
WARNING
This test can be hazardous. Avoid any contact with line voltage. Any time during the test that the
ground connection is open, do not touch the chassis or the patient cable.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 149
ECG Lead Leakage Current Test Diagram
Hot Neutral -
(open neutral)
ECG
cable
System
under
test
Powered on
(open ground)
Ground wire:
Green or Green/Yellow
Ground wire closed for Normal condition,
AC microammeter
Ground wire open for first Single Fault condition,
Neutral wire open (ground closed) for second Single Fault condition
I
(current)
LIMITS: UL, IEC, and CSA:
ECG input (defibrillator proof):
For
I = 10 microamperes Normal condition
7ASW026
ECG Lead Leakage Current Test Procedure
➤ To test ECG lead leakage current
1. Set the analyzer to test ECG leads.
3. Turn on the ultrasound system by starting its internal PC.
4. Connect all ECG leads to the ultrasound system and to the appropriate jacks on the analyzer.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 150
5. Take ECG lead leakage current measurements with both normal and reverse polarity. Check
that the highest value is within the limit specified for Normal condition in Figure 6-3 on
page 149.
6. Take ECG lead leakage current measurements in open ground condition, with both normal
and reverse polarity. Check that the highest value is within the limit specified for Single Fault
condition in Figure 6-3. Write down the highest value; this is the value for the first Single
Fault condition.
7. Take ECG lead leakage current measurements in open neutral condition, with both normal
and reverse polarity. Check that the highest value is within the limit specified for Single Fault
condition in Figure 6-3. Write down the highest value; this is the value for the second Single
Fault condition.
8. Record the highest current value measured in step 6 and step 7. Check that the highest value
is within the limit specified for Single Fault condition in Figure 6-3.
Failure to meet the specified limits may indicate a fault with the isolation of the Physio module.
ECG Lead
Isolation
Leakage
Current Test
This test checks ECG leads by applying voltage from the mains to the ECG leads, to check that
the system is isolated from such voltages. Figure 6-4 on page 151 shows the basic electrical concept of the ECG Lead Isolation Leakage Current test. Use a safety analyzer and complete the
procedure that follows the figure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-4
HD11 Service Manual
Page 151
ECG Lead Isolation Leakage Current Test Diagram
ECG patient
cable
Hot Neutral -
System
under
test
Powered on
Ground wire
Green or
Green/Yellow
AC microammeter
Mains
Voltage
LIMITS:
UL, IEC, and CSA: I = 50 microamperes RMS
WARNING
I
(current)
1011E29
This test is hazardous. It applies line voltage to the ECG leads. Avoid accidental contact with the
line voltage. Do not touch the chassis or the ECG cable while performing the test. Keep the
ECG cable at least 20 cm (8 in) from any grounded or conductive surfaces.
NOTE During the isolation test, select only normal polarity. Do not impose open ground or
open neutral conditions.
ECG Lead Isolation Leakage Current Test Procedure
➤ To test ECG lead isolation leakage current
1. Set the analyzer’s mode to test ECG isolation.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 152
4. Connect ECG leads to the ultrasound system, but do not connect the ECG leads to the analyzer yet.
5. In normal polarity, perform a lead isolation test. Record the reading in microamperes. This
reading is the correction factor used in step 7.
6. Connect all ECG leads to the appropriate jacks on the analyzer and perform a lead isolation
test. Record the reading in microamperes.
7. Subtract the step 5 correction factor from the step 6 reading to get an accurate isolation
leakage measurement. Record this value. Check that the value is within the limit specified in
Figure 6-4 on page 151.
NOTE Some analyzers do not require subtracting the correction factor from the lead isolation
reading. For more information, see the analyzer’s documentation.
Transducer
Tests
This section describes two electrical leakage current tests for transducers. To ensure patient
safety, it is very important to verify the integrity of the insulating layers of all transducers.
When you perform the safety tests, use saline solution in a container as a conductive medium.
The solution penetrates any cracks or holes in the transducer insulation and provides an electrical path between the submerged lead wire and the inner transducer shield.
NOTE Before proceeding with any transducer test, thoroughly inspect the transducer. If the
transducer is a TEE, check that its steering controls are working properly.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 153
The following tools are required for transducer safety tests:
•
Safety analyzer
•
Saline holder
•
ECG lead wire
•
Saline solution. If saline is not available, mix 27 grams of table salt in 3 liters of tap water.
Transducer Leakage Current Test (Source)
This test checks a transducer for electrical leakage while it is connected to the ultrasound system. The system sends normal operating voltages to the transducer, and leakage is measured
using a safety analyzer. Figure 6-5 on page 154 shows the basic electrical concept of the Transducer Leakage Current test. Complete the procedure that follows the figure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 154
Transducer Leakage Current Test Diagram
Hot Neutral -
System
under
test
(open neutral)
Transducer
submerged in
saline
Powered on
(open ground)
Ground wire:
Green or Green/Yellow
AC microammeter
Ground wire closed for Normal condition,
Ground wire open for first Single Fault condition,
Neutral wire open (ground closed) for second Single Fault condition
I
(current)
ECG
lead
wire
type transducers:
For
I = 10 microamperes Normal condition,
For
type transducers:
I = 100 microamperes Normal condition,
7ASW027
Transducer Leakage Current Test Procedure
➤ To test transducer leakage current
1. Set the analyzer mode to test ECG leads.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 155
4. Plug the transducer to be tested into the ultrasound system. Connect an ECG lead wire to
the appropriate jack on the analyzer.
5. Fill a test container with enough saline to completely cover the appropriate parts of the
transducer. Insert the exposed end of the ECG lead into the saline, and carefully insert the
transducer:
CAUTION
-
For transthoracic and endocavity transducers, submerge the head and 5 cm (2 in) of the
cable. Be careful not to submerge the connector.
-
For TEE transducers, submerge all of the flexible shaft that would normally enter the
body of the patient: 100 cm (39.4 in) for adult TEE, 60 cm (23.6 in) for pediatric TEE.
When submerging a TEE transducer, be careful to not submerge its control handle or allow
saline to contact its control handle. Liquid inside the control handle causes corrosion and failure.
6. Set the analyzer to read leakage current in microamperes.
7. Read the current in both normal and reverse polarity, and record the highest value. Check
that the highest value is within the limit specified for Normal condition in Figure 6-5 on
page 154. (Match the transducer type symbol on the transducer connector or cable with the
symbol in the figure.)
8. Read the current with an open ground condition imposed, in both normal and reverse polarity. Write down the highest value; this is the value for the first Single Fault condition.
9. Read the current with an open neutral condition imposed, in both normal and reverse polarity. Write down the highest value; this is the value for the second Single Fault condition.
10. Check that the highest current value measured in step 8 and step 9 is within the limit specified for Single Fault condition in Figure 6-5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 156
Values exceeding the limits may indicate a fault in the transducer housing or the cable sheath.
To locate a fault precisely, repeat the measurement while slowly inserting the transducer into
the saline. The aberrant reading appears when the fault in the cable enters the saline.
NOTE TEE and endocavity transducers have a grounded jacket just under the outer plastic skin
of the cable. Their leakage currents can measure within the specified limits even if there
is a fault in the outer skin. Step 11 tests for this condition.
11. In normal polarity with an open ground condition imposed, measure ground wire leakage
(see “Ground Wire Leakage Current Test” on page 146). Compare this to the highest value
for transducer leakage current, Single Fault condition obtained in step 10.
If the transducer leakage is greater than 80% of the chassis leakage, there is a fault in the
transducer. To locate the fault, slowly insert the transducer in the saline, as in step 10.
Transducer Isolation Leakage Current Test
Figure 6-6 on page 157 shows the basic electrical concept of the Transducer Isolation Leakage
Current test. The transducer is submerged in a container of saline solution. Mains AC voltage is
introduced into the saline solution, and leakage current in the transducer is measured using a
safety analyzer. Complete the procedure that follows the figure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 6-6
HD11 Service Manual
Page 157
Transducer Isolation Leakage Current Test Diagram
System
under
test
Hot Neutral -
Transducer
submerged in
saline
Powered on
Ground wire
Green or
Green/Yellow
AC microammeter
Mains
voltage
type transducers:
For
I = 50 microamperes
For
I
(current)
ECG
lead
wire
type transducers:
I = 500 microamperes
1101e30
WARNING
This test is hazardous. It applies line voltage to the ECG and transducer cables. Avoid accidental
contact with the line voltage. Do not touch the chassis or the ECG or transducer cables while
performing the test. Keep the ECG and transducer cables at least 20 cm (8 in) from any
grounded or conductive surfaces.
NOTE During the isolation test, select only normal polarity. Do not impose open ground or
open neutral conditions.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 158
Transducer Isolation Leakage Current Test Procedure
➤ To test transducer isolation leakage current
1. Set the analyzer to test ECG.
4. Plug the transducer to be tested into the ultrasound system.
5. Fill a test container with enough saline to completely cover the appropriate parts of the
transducer.
6. Insert the exposed end of the ECG lead wire into the saline, and then carefully insert the
transducer:
CAUTION
-
For transthoracic and endocavity transducers, submerge the head and 5 cm (1.96 in) of
the cable. Be careful not to submerge the connector.
-
For TEE transducers, submerge all of the flexible shaft that would normally enter the
body of the patient: 100 cm (39.3 in) for adult TEE, 60 cm (23.6 in) for pediatric TEE.
When submerging a TEE transducer, be careful to not submerge its control handle or allow
saline to contact its control handle. Liquid inside the control handle causes corrosion and failure.
7. Measure the isolation leakage current of the transducer. Record the value, and check that it
is within the limit specified in Figure 6-6 on page 157.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
PC
Diagnostics
HD11 Service Manual
Page 159
Performance Tests: PC Diagnostics
Entering into simulation mode successfully (press Ctrl+Alt+s while system is powering-on/
booting) provides the knowledge that the PC is basically operational.
PC problems can often be diagnosed using the IBM-Hitachi drive fitness test (DFT). For detailed
information about the test, search “IBM-Hitachi drive fitness test” on the Internet.
IBM-Hitachi
Drive Fitness
Test
➤ Creating a DFT Bootable CD
1. Download the bootable version of the DFT setup program from a provider Web site into a
temporary directory on your PC.
2. Click Start, and then click Run.
3. Click the Browse button to locate the setup program.
4. Click the file name, and then click Open.
5. Click OK to run the setup program.
6. Insert a blank CD when prompted.
➤ Using the Drive Fitness Test to Test PC Functions
1. Change the VGA display height adjustment to show the whole display (see “To adjust the
VGA vertical size” on page 165).
2. Insert the DFT CD into the CD-RW disk drive.
3. Press the Mic key repeatedly, about once per second, until the Please Select Boot
Device: window opens. (see “To change the boot sequence temporarily” on page 342).
4. In the Please select boot device: window, ensure that Removable Dev. is highlighted.
5. Press Return.
The system continues to reboot from the CD.
6. Select ATA support.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 160
Performance Tests: PC Diagnostics
NOTE Ignore the error messages about missing SCSI disk controllers.
8. When DFT testing is complete, change ensure the boot sequence back to standard (see “To
change the boot sequence temporarily” on page 342.)
NOTE If the drive fitness test passes, the BIOS, PC Motherboard, Video Graphics card, and
physical condition of your hardrive are probably good.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
7
HD11 Service Manual
Page 161
Adjustments: Introduction
Adjustments
Introduction
This section contains information for adjusting the system monitor. Except for the monitor,
there are no other calibration or alignment adjustments to make in the field for this system.
Except for the monitor, there are no other voltage adjustments to make in the field for this system.
NOTE The procedures in this section should only be performed by qualified technicians who
have been trained by Philips to maintain HD11 systems.
Adjusting the
Monitor
This section contains instructions for performing adjustments to a monitor in the field. These
instructions assume that system power is switched on.
The four buttons on the bottom, right-front of the monitor not only adjust video brightness and
contrast within the range established via system setups (see “To set the monitor BRIGHTNESS
and CONTRAST range” on page 162), but are also the means of accessing and navigating the
on-screen display (OSD), which is used to set monitor parameters.
When the two right buttons are pressed simultaneously as the monitor powers up, the OSD
Main Menu (Figure 7-1) is available.
Pressing the two right buttons together also degausses the CRT.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Adjusting the
Monitor
BRIGHTNESS and
CONTRAST
Range
Page 162
Adjustments: Adjusting the Monitor
There is a tool for setting the range of the monitor brightness and contrast controls.
➤ To set the monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST range
1. In the Setup window, click Monitor Adjust. The system displays the BRIGHTNESS and
CONTRAST range adjust tool.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen to set the monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST range.
Adjusting the
Monitor Signal
Input Voltage
Submenus of the OSD Main Menu control the size and geometry of the display and set the monitor’s signal input voltage.
➤ To verify the monitor signal input voltage setting
1. Remove the monitor cable connection access panel (Figure 5-22) and disconnect the power
cord from the rear of the monitor.
2. Hold down the two rightmost monitor buttons and reconnect the power cord. Continue
holding the buttons until you again see the screen that was displayed when you unplugged the
monitor. (This needs some patience, as it does not always happen easily.)
3. Simultaneously press the two center monitor buttons. The OSD Main Menu appears
(Figure 7-1).
NOTE Do not press the two center buttons for longer than 10 seconds or the OSD menu
locks and you will not be able to make any adjustments. To unlock the menu, press the
two center buttons for more than 10 seconds or until the “unlocked” message appears
and then release the buttons. Press the buttons again until the Main Menu appears.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 7-1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 163
Monitor OSD Main Menu
4. Use one of the two rightmost monitor buttons to scroll to and highlight Advanced Controls.
5. Press the leftmost monitor button. The Advanced Controls menu appears (Figure 7-2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 7-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 164
Monitor OSD Advanced Controls Menu
6. Use one of the two rightmost monitor buttons to scroll to INPUT 0.7V.
7. Press the leftmost monitor button.
8. Use one of the two rightmost monitor buttons to scroll to SAVE & RETURN.
9. Press the leftmost monitor button.
10. On the OSD Main menu, scroll to EXIT OSD and press the leftmost monitor button to
exit the OSD menus.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Adjusting VGA
Vertical Size
HD11 Service Manual
Page 165
For best viewing of the BIOS settings (Table 13-2), the monitor VGA vertical size can be
adjusted. This adjustment does not affect the normal display mode.
➤ To adjust the VGA vertical size
1. Reboot the system.
2. As the system boots up, press the Review key repeatedly, until the BIOS screen opens.
3. Access the monitor OSD Main Menu (same as step 1 through step 3). The OSD Main menu
is displayed. Scroll to SIZE & POSITION.
4. Press the leftmost monitor button. The Size & Position menu (Figure 7-3) is displayed.
Figure 7-3
Monitor OSD Size & Position Menu
5. Scroll to VERTICAL SIZE.
6. Press the leftmost monitor button. The vertical size adjustment bar is displayed:.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 166
7. Use the two rightmost monitor buttons to adjust the vertical size so the bottom of the BIOS
display is visible.
8. Press the leftmost monitor button. The vertical size adjustment bar closes.
9. Scroll to SAVE & RETURN in the Size & Position menu.
10. Press the leftmost monitor button. The Size & Position menu closes.
11. In the OSD Main menu, scroll to EXIT OSD and press the leftmost monitor button to exit.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
8
HD11 Service Manual
Page 167
Preventive Maintenance: Introduction
Preventive Maintenance
Introduction
This section identifies activities supporting the quality assurance audit (QAA) concept that you
should perform in accordance with Customer Field Service policies and schedules. QAA activities include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following types of concerns:
•
System Performance
•
Electrical and Mechanical Integrity
•
Cleaning
Equipment
and Supplies
The tools, parts, and supplies needed for the preventive maintenance activities are identified as
part of the described or referenced procedures.
Checking
System
Performance
Refer to Section 6, “Performance Tests” for information about tests that need to be performed
on the system under various conditions.
Checking the
System
Electrical and
Mechanical
Integrity
•
Table 6-1 describes what tests need to be performed following preventative maintenance
(PM) tasks, installations, and repairs.
•
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 tell when the test blocks identified in Table 6-1 should be performed.
Ensure that all system hardware is in the correct place and is properly secured. Check the system for abnormalities or conditions that do not meet the manufacturer’s specifications. Inspect
wheel locks, cables, power cords, transducers, transducer connectors, fans, shields, ground
straps, PCBs, fasteners, and controls and indicators to ensure they are in good working condition. Check that monitor and control panel articulation works properly.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 168
Preventive Maintenance: Cleaning
Cleaning
Clean the system components and peripherals as circumstaces or Customer Field Service policies and schedules require.
Exterior and
Use a vacuum cleaner, compressed air, or soft-bristle brush to remove any lint and dust from the
airflow passages and components associated with the fan assemblies, PCBs, and any other system
components and peripherals that may have accumulated dust or dirt. Use mild, nonabrasive,
standard computer-cleaning products to clean the monitor, keyboard, system, and peripheral
surfaces.
Interior
Assemblies
CAUTION
When cleaning the system keyboard and monitor, take care not to get any solution inside the
housings. Also, take care not to scratch the face of the monitor while cleaning it.
Air Filter
Clean or replace the system air filter as its condition warrants. See “To remove the fan air filter”
on page 264.
Trackball
Clean or replace the trackball as its condition warrants.
➤ To clean the trackball
1. Unscrew and remove the bezel that surrounds the trackball on the system control panel. If
you don’t have a trackball-removal tool, a paper clip inserted in one of the small holes in the
bezel can help to start unscrewing the bezel.
2. Push the trackball up from the underside of the control panel to remove it.
3. Clean the trackball with an alcohol-dampened pad.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 169
Preventive Maintenance: Cleaning
4. Clean the two encoder shafts and the bearing surface with an alcohol-dampened pad.
5. reinstall the trackball and bezel.
Transducers
Refer to the HD11 Getting Started manual for information on the general care, handling, cleaning,
and storing of Philips transducers for the HD11 ultrasound system
Exterior
Surfaces
Use a rag with mild soap and water to clean exterior surfaces, including those on the system,
monitor, and peripherals. Also clean the control panel and knobs. Ink or stubborn stains should
be removed with rubbing alcohol or a stronger detergent and immediately washed with mild,
soapy water.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the system, do not use acetone, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), paint thinner, or
other strong solvents to clean exterior plastic surfaces.
CAUTION
Use adequate ESD safeguards when performing service and maintenance procedures. See
“About Electrostatic Discharge” on page 56.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
9
HD11 Service Manual
Page 170
Troubleshooting: Introduction
Troubleshooting
Introduction
The troubleshooting information provided in this section will assist you in determining if a system is failing, and, if so, can help you isolate the cause and initiate a corrective action.
Warnings and
Cautions
Review Section 3, “Safety” before continuing. Also follow any additional warnings and cautions
contained in this section. Before taking any action that might cause data to be lost, back up data
as described in “Backing Up and Restoring” on page 181.
All Troubleshooting
Starts Here
Reviewing and applying the following basic guidelines can produce effective troubleshooting and
responsible call resolution. Even an experienced and successful troubleshooter who can solve
problems without stepping through the Effective Problem-Solving Checklist (Table 9-1), might
find it beneficial to review it. Always make notes as you troubleshoot; if properly communicated,
some or all of the information you discover can help you or others in the future.
Table 9-1
Effective Problem-Solving Checklist
Basic Troubleshooting Step
Link to Detailed Guidelines
Identify the symptom
Re-create the problem
Isolate the cause
Develop a solution
Perform a corrective action
Verify that the system works
Put system in service and close the call
“Clarifying Symptoms” on page 171
“Re-creating a Problem” on page 172
“Isolating Causes” on page 172
“Developing a Solution” on page 174
“Implementing a Solution” on page 174
“Verifying Corrective Actions” on page 175
“Returning the System to Service” on page 175
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Clarifying
Symptoms
HD11 Service Manual
Page 171
Troubleshooting: All Troubleshooting Starts Here
These actions and considerations can help to clearly describe a symptom, which is useful in isolating the cause and can also be useful later when documenting the problem and the solution.
Make notes about the problem you are investigating as you read through this section:
•
Have the user restate problem and verify that you are checking the correct system.
•
Are there any other systems exhibiting this symptom or is it exclusive to one system?
•
Is this the symptom of a real problem, or is it possibly an unrealistic expectation of the system features and options set?
•
Clarify the symptom: Is it a hang, a crash, a shutdown, an image artifact, an error code, not
booting, or other symptom? Write down a clear statement of what the symptom is and how
it manifests itself:
•
-
How does it happen: What keystrokes, what modality, what preset, what transducer?
-
When does it happen: Time of day, during boot-up, during scan, image review, sending to
a network, during a calculation, during a measurement, playing/recording VCR, printing,
acquiring an image, annotating, other?
-
How often does it happen: Intermittently, predictably, all of the time?
Categorize/localize the problem:
-
Is it a printing problem, an image quality or viewing problem, a data export or import
problem, or other?
-
Consider if the symptom indicates an operating procedural error or a system failure. If it
is a system failure, determine whether it seems to be a hardware or software problem. If
it is a software problem, determine if it is an operating system or ultrasound problem.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 172
•
If possible, make hardcopy prints of the system displays that shows the first and subsequent
indications of the failure. Do this as soon as possible to ensure this type of data is not lost.
(Relevant data is often lost when the system is rebooted.)
•
What, if anything, does the user do to recover from the problem?
•
Does the symptom match up with any of the symptoms and solutions listed in Table 9-2?
Re-creating a
Problem
Successfully re-creating a problem that doesn’t damage the system can produce information that
is useful to troubleshooting and solution verification. But, before you try, be sure that you have
noted all the useful information you can. Before changing anything, consider if the attempt will
cause the loss of information or will change a circumstance that is better than re-creating the
problem. If you decide to attempt to re-create the problem, try to do so several times.
Isolating Causes
Remember that, sometimes, more than one cause can produce similar symptoms. Try to identify
as many causes for the given symptom as your experience and research allows and then prioritize them in order of most likely root cause of the problem. Attempt to eliminate them
one-by-one, staring with the most likely cause.
Checking for Obvious Causes
Check for the following obvious causes:
•
Check for correct voltage at electrical outlets, “tripped” circuit breakers, blown fuses, and
disconnected or damaged wires. Always check that power cords are plugged in, and inspect
them for wear.
•
Consider the situation: Was there a system option or hardware change recently? When was
the last time the system was working correctly and what, if any, influencing circumstances
have occurred since?
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
•
Page 173
Check if the symptom and probable cause may already be listed (Table 9-2) for quick reference and resolution.
Investigating and Testing
If you haven’t discovered the cause of the problem yet, more in-depth analysis is necessary:
•
Take a moment to review the data you’ve collected about the problem so far. Hopefully, you
have been able to categorize the symptom as a hardware, software, operator-induced, or
environmental failure.
-
Hardware failure: Cause usually determined through use of troubleshooting tools. A fix is
typically realized by replacing suspect/candidate hardware until the problem is resolved.
NOTE Consider the value against the difficulties of swapping (suspect) hardware components
with good ones. Do not cause additional problems or confuse your search. Never swap
parts if a known good item might be damaged.
•
-
Software failure or corruption: Even if a fix is realized by reloading software, the cause of
the failure or corruption needs to be investigated: Is there a system architecture failure, is
the user doing anything to cause the problem?
-
Operator-induced: Is the user expecting more than the system is designed to deliver,
exceeding the capability of the system, or mis-operating it (over-filling the hard disk drive,
pulling the plug, or other)? A solution can be more user training or a work-around. Investigate to see if an option ought to be enabled or if there is an enhancement scheduled in
a future release that might solve the problem.
-
Environmental: Are there any electrical power, EMI/RFI, or network connectivity difficulties external to the system affecting its performance?
Verify more easily checked factors first, such as system setup/configuration.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 174
•
If you haven’t already, verify that all system voltages are present and within tolerance.
•
Conduct tests from Section 6, “Performance Tests” as required to determine if and how the
system is failing.
Developing a
Solution
When think you know what the problem is, decide what changes you need to make to correct
the problem and write down the steps you want to take to make the repair, especially if the
sequence of your actions is important. Even if you don’t think you need to do this for yourself, it
can be useful to others when you properly document the problem and its resolution. You may
benefit from this yourself in the future.
Implementing a
Solution
Implement your solution by performing the corrective actions you developed. Proceed cautiously and systematically. Make only one change at a time, and verify that the change you made
brings about the result you expected before making any other change.
It is not unusual for another problem to surface when you are applying changes to fix what you
thought was the problem. If the change didn’t bring about the result you expected, consider if
that unexpected result brings you closer to the actual cause of the problem. If it doesn’t, consider returning the system to the known condition it was in before your last change and verify its
condition before proceeding.
Review your solution and any “discovery” that your change produced. Decide if you should proceed with your original solution or go back to investigating and testing. To avoid producing confusing and conflicting data, do not deviate too far from the methodical approach that allows you
to isolate the failure by eliminating possible causes along the way.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 175
Troubleshooting: Known Symptoms, Causes, and Corrective Actions
Verifying
Corrective
Actions
Once the system fault has been identified and you have performed (authorized) corrective
actions to repair the failure, conduct whatever tests are necessary to ensure that the problem is
fixed and that the system meets its optimum level of performance. Typically, it will be the same
testing that led you to isolating the cause of the specific problem (refer to your notes) and then
additional tests that give you confidence that the system is generally performing as it should.
Returning the
System to
Service
Once the reported problem is fixed and the system tests are successful, return the system to the
customer and close the call:
Known
Symptoms,
Causes, and
Corrective
Actions
•
Formally document the problem and the solution: Write down exactly what problems you
discovered and what corrections you made.
•
Provide feedback: Communicate to all affected parties what problems you discovered, how
you arrived at that conclusion, and what corrections you made. Include this information with
parts that are returned for repair and, if appropriate, send e-mail with this information to ISS
personnel who could find it useful.
Some problems that have been previously experienced and corrected are documented here and
are summarized for quick reference in Table 9-2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 176
Table 9-2
Previously Experienced Problems
Symptom Summary Links to Cause/Action Details
“Incompatible Hardware Shutdown Error” on page 176
System monitor has a “shuddering” display or noise in the image.
Consider the possibility of EMI or RFI as described in “Checking for EMI and RFI” on
page 178. Check print quality for similar noise. If it is on the printout, it is probably an
internal system failure. Troubleshoot the PCBs.
“Passwords Don’t Work” on page 178
“System Hangs or Crashes” on page 179
“F-key Alternates on Control Panel” on page 180
Incompatible
Hardware
Shutdown Error
EnVisor transducer connector modules and TR boards can be physically installed into HD11 systems. This creates an untested, therefore unapproved, system configuration. To check for this
unwanted condition, at power on, the system conducts a check of the tranducer connector
modules and the TR boards to determine if they are the correct type for the system: If one (or
more) of these boards is not the correct type for the system, the following type of error message is displayed and the system is prevented from imaging.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 177
Contained in this message are the software IDs of the incompatible boards. These IDs are internal software identifiers that are not related to any label on the PC board itself.
For TR boards, software ID “B1” is accepted by HD11 systems. If an EnVisor TR board ID (A1)
is reported in the error message, the system software has detected an incompatible TR board
installed in the system. This must be replaced with a correct board before the system can be
used.
For transducer connector modules, the following software IDs are accepted by HD11 systems:
Explora module
ID = 3
Cartridge module
ID = 2
Pencil probe module
ID = 6
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 178
If an EnVisor ID (D1 or D4) is reported in the error message, a wrong transducer connector
module is installed in the system and must be replaced with a correct one (the Cartridge module
can be used on both systems).
Clicking OK in the error message, displays the Setup window (Figure 5-1). From the Setup window, you can access any of the Setup menus. If you exit Setup, the system shuts down.
Passwords Don’t
Work
The HD11 system boots to a Caps Lock = on default condition. Verify that the Caps Lock on
indication (A) at the bottom right of the display is off [no (A) showing] to ensure that passwords
entered are not all uppercase.
NOTE The results of changing/switching Caps Lock does not update on display until you go
back to the ultrasound application.
Checking for
EMI and RFI
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) can degrade the performance of the HD11. For example, a transducer placed close to an ECG cable can increase
interference. Moving the ECG cable or other medical equipment away from the transducer can
reduce interference. EMI and RFI can conceivably cause image noise or monitor distortion if the
system EMI shielding has been compromised. EMI and RFI can be generated by a variety of electrical devices. The interference can be transmitted over power lines or radiated through the air.
Answering the following questions can help locate the source of interference and help determine
whether the problem is with the system or with the scanning environment.
•
Is the interference intermittent or constant?
•
Does the interference appear with only one transducer or with several transducers?
•
Do two different transducers operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
•
Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
System Hangs
or Crashes
HD11 Service Manual
Page 179
•
Can the EMC coupling path be attenuated?
•
Does operating an AM radio tuned between stations around 1,600 Hz (thus using it as an
EMI/RFI source tester) identify interference, which would be noticeable as audible static
noise on the radio while walking it around the room. Sometimes EMI/RFI sources are not
constant, but are temporary or surge situations that may only occur at certain times.
•
Considering and locating the source/cause is important, but regardless of the source, since
the system is shielded against EMI and RFI, troubleshoot the system to determine if the EMI/
RFI shielding has been compromised. One place to start is to verify that all the system panels
are appropriately secured with all of the factory-approved fasteners.
Often the terms “hang” and “crash” are used interchangeably to describe the same symptom.
However, with the HD11, these two terms describe two different behaviors. It is important to
understand the difference between these terms because the causes are different, the troubleshooting techniques are different, and the information available to the FSE is different.
A “hang” is when the system stops responding to the keyboard. There is a normal image on the
monitor and the system may continue to be working (updated data in the image area, clock is
correct and continues changing), but the system does not respond to hard keys, soft keys, or the
trackball.
A “crash” occurs when the system detects an abnormal condition in either the hardware or the
software. When this happens, the system starts the “Crash Recorder,” which saves various logs
and memory dumps. The Crash Recorder displays a dialog box on the screen.
There is not any specific data associated with a “hang” (because from the software point of view,
everything is behaving normally. There may be something recorded in the event log which provides a clue to the cause of the hang. However, the best source of information is to ask the customer about the keystrokes prior to a “hang.”
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 180
NOTE Cycle power at least once a week if a system is left on permanently. (As the user
presses buttons and different parts of the software are used, different segments of “virtual memory” are acquired and released. Virtual memory is handled on the hard disk
drive and as it is used and released, it is subject to fragmentation. After a while, the virtual memory area can become fragmented into small pieces, so that there is no longer
a large enough “chunk” for the system to do what is needed. If this happens, the system
will crash.)
F-key Alternates
on Control
Panel
If F-keys are needed for troubleshooting and an externally-connected QWERTY keyboard is not
working, you can use these F-key equivalents on the control panel:
Key
Control Panel Equivalent
Review on control panel
Report on control panel
CW on control panel
TDI on control panel
F1 on QWERTY
F2 on QWERTY
F9 on QWERTY
F10 on QWERTY
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Backing Up
and Restoring
Page 181
Troubleshooting: Backing Up and Restoring
Before you begin installing software, replacing an HDD, or taking any service action that might
cause data to be lost, perform the following tasks:
•
Ensure that the customer has saved any important studies.
•
Make a backup CD of the system software options and custom presets. See “Creating a
Backup CD” on page 181.
•
If the system is configured for network connection, write down the network settings. See
“Recording the Network Settings” on page 183.
Creating a Backup CD
➤ To create a backup CD
1. Start the system.
2. Insert a blank CD-R (or CD-RW) disk in the CD-writable drive.
3. With the ultrasound application running, press the Setup key. The Setup window opens
(Figure 5-1).
4. Click the CD tab. The Settings (CD) window opens (Figure 9-1).
5. Click Backup. The Backup Settings window opens (Figure 9-2).
6. Click Select All.
7. Click Start.
The backup procedure runs. When the procedure is done, the Backup Settings window
closes.
NOTE While it backs up the presets, the backup program also automatically backs up the system settings, the peripheral settings, and the installed options.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 182
8. Click Close.
9. Remove the CD and store it in a safe place.
Figure 9-1
Settings Window (CD)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 9-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 183
Backup Settings Window
Recording the Network Settings
➤ To record the network settings
1. With the ultrasound application running, press the Setup key.
2. Click the This System tab.
3. Click the Dicom button.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 184
5. Click Network Settings.
6. Write down the displayed settings.
Restoring System Options and Custom Presets
➤ To restore custom presets
1. Insert the backup CD you created before installing the software.
2. With the ultrasound application running, press the Setup key on the system control panel.
3. Click the CD tab.
4. Click Restore. The Restore Settings window opens (Figure 9-3).
The first time you click Restore, the presets do not appear in the window because no applications are yet installed on the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 9-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 185
Restore Settings Window
6. Select all of the check boxes for System Settings, Printer and VCR Settings, and
Options.
NOTE Options can be restored only to the system that created the backup CD. The software
matches the serial number of the system to that of the system that created the disk.
7. Click Start.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 186
8. When the restoration is complete, click Restore.
All presets on the backup CD should appear in the Restore Settings window.
10. Click Start.
11. When the restoration is complete, click Close.
12. Remove the CD.
Restoring the Network Settings
➤ To restore the network settings
1. With the ultrasound application running, press the Setup key.
3. Click the Dicom button.
5. Click Network Settings.
6. Enter the settings you recorded in “Recording the Network Settings” on page 183.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
10
HD11 Service Manual
Page 187
Disassembly and Reassembly: Introduction
Disassembly and Reassembly
Introduction
This section provides specific information about system disassembly that may be required for the
removal and installation of field-replaceable parts. If not covered by a detailed procedure, the
means of removing a system part can be discerned from the illustrations in this section as well as
from those in Section 13, “Configuration” and Section 14, “Parts”. Instructions for crating the
system for shipment are also included.
Warnings and
Cautions
Review Section 3, “Safety” before continuing. Also follow any additional warnings and cautions
contained in this section.
WARNING
Always turn the power off, disconnect the main power cord from the wall outlet, and wait at
least 30 seconds before removing or installing any PCB, module, or component.
CAUTION
Always use correct ESD procedures. ESD damage is cumulative and may not be noticeable at
first. ESD symptoms may be first exhibited as a slight degradation of performance or image quality.
NOTE The video monitor and all batteries inside this product contain mercury and must be
recycled or disposed of according to local, state, and federal laws. Do not replace individual batteries in the field. Return all products containing mercury to Bothell for disposal.
Refer to Figure 10-1 for links to disassembly procedures by specific part.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 188
Disassembly and Reassembly: Disassembly Procedures
Disassembly Procedures
Figure 10-1
Disassembly Procedure List
(1 of 2)
NOTE Refer to Section 14, “Parts” for part numbers.
VCR or Color Printer
System Enclosures
B&W Printer
Modem
Monitor
System Casters
Control Panel
Soft Key Panel and Speakers
Peripheral Mounting Plates
NOTE
List Continued
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 189
Disassembly Procedure List
(2 of 2)
PC Assembly
Rear I/O Assembly and
Video I/O Board
PC Interface Boards
Lift Column Gas Strut
E-box Assembly
E-box Card Cage Boards
Fan Assemblies
Backplane Board
Fan Air Filter
Power Supply
Crating the HD11
Ultrasound System
NOTE
Previous List
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 190
System Enclosures
Figure 10-3
Removing the Left Side Panel
NOTE The two side panels must be
removed before removing the
front panel or top cover.
➤ To remove the system enclosures
1. Disconnect the system power cord
from the main AC supply.
2. Remove the two Torx screws securing the left side panel enclosure.
Removing this panel allows access to
the PC assembly.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
1
3. Pivot the back side of the panel away
from the system, and then gently
slide the panel toward the rear to
remove it. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-4
HD11 Service Manual
Page 191
Removing the Right Side Panel
4. Remove the two Torx screws securing the right side panel enclosure.
the E-box and power supply assemblies.
5
4
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 192
Removing the Front Panel
6. Remove the six Torx screws securing
the front panel enclosure.
6
7. Pull the panel straight out from the
front of the system. Proceed to
step 8.
Torx screws (6 plcs)
7
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-6
HD11 Service Manual
Page 193
Removing the Top Cover with a Top Hatch
8
Top hatch
9
Flathead
screws
(4 plcs)
If your system has a peripheral mounting
plate installed, refer to Figure 10-21 for
peripheral mounting plate disassembly.
See Figure 10-22 for top cover removal
with a peripheral mounting plate bracket
installed.
8. Remove the four flathead screws
securing the top hatch. Remove the
top hatch.
9. These four flathead screws also
secure the top cover. Lift and slide
the top cover toward the rear of the
system. Proceed to step 10.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-7
10
HD11 Service Manual
Page 194
Removing the Side and Rear Base Skirts
Torx screws
(4 plcs)
11
NOTE Any of the base skirts can be
removed without removing any
other system enclosures.
10. To remove either of the side base
skirts, remove the two Torx screws
securing the skirt to the base of the
cart.
11. To remove the rear base skirt,
remove the four Torx screws securing the skirt to the base of the cart.
This completes the system enclosures
removal procedure.
Perform this procedure in reverse for
reassembly.
Torx screws (2 plcs) 10
Return to Disassembly Procedure List (1
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 195
Monitor
Figure 10-8
Removing the Video Monitor
➤ To remove the system monitor
2. Remove the cable connection access
panel (Figure 5-22).
3. Disconnect all the monitor cables
(Figure 5-24).
5
4. Press up on the latch handle under
the front edge of the monitor and
pull the monitor forward until it
stops.
4
5. Tilt up the front of the monitor and
lift the monitor off the twivel base.
Perform the Monitor installation procedure for reassembly.
4
Latch handle
Perform all system checks to verify performance.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 196
Control Panel
Figure 10-9
Removing the Control Panel Screws
1
Torx screws
(5 plcs)
1
Torx screws
(5 plcs)
➤ To remove the control panel
1. From the underside of the control
panel, remove the 10 screws securing the control panel to the control
panel housing. The screws are
marked with an embossed arrow
next to each screw. Remove only
these 10 screws. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-10
HD11 Service Manual
Page 197
Removing the Control Panel
2. Tilt the control panel up from the
front side.
3. Disconnect the seven cables connected to the control panel PCB.
Refer to Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2
when re-cabling the control panel
assembly.
2
This completes the control panel
removal procedure.
reassembly.
3
Cables
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 198
Soft Key Panel and Speakers
Figure 10-11
Removing the Control Panel Screws
1
Torx screws
(5 plcs)
1
Torx screws
(5 plcs)
➤ To remove the soft key panel
and system speakers
panel, remove the 10 screws securing the control panel to the control
panel housing. The screws are
marked with an embossed arrow
next to each screw. Remove only
these 10 screws. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-12
Page 199
Sliding the Control Panel Forward
One to two inch gap
2. Lift the control panel out of the
housing just enough so it can be slid
forward approximately 1 to 2 inches,
away from the soft key assembly.
Proceed to step 3.
2
Soft key panel
2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-13
HD11 Service Manual
Page 200
Removing the Lower Soft Key Panel Screws
3
Torx screws
(3 plcs)
3
Torx screws
(3 plcs)
panel, remove the six screws securing the soft key panel to the control
panel housing. Remove only these six
screws. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-14
HD11 Service Manual
Page 201
Removing the Cable Connection Access
Panel
4. Grasp the bottom of the cable connection panel at the rear of the system monitor and pull outward to
remove. Proceed to step 5.
4
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 202
Removing the Video Monitor
5. Disconnect all the monitor cables
(Figure 5-24).
6. Press up on the latch handle under
the front edge of the monitor and
pull the monitor forward until it
stops.
7
7. Tilt up the front of the monitor and
lift the monitor off the twivel base.
Proceed to step 8.
6
5
6
Latch handle
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-16
HD11 Service Manual
Page 203
Removing the Upper Soft Key Panel Screws
Rotate 90 degrees
(twivel base)
8
9
8. Rotate the monitor twivel base
90 degress.
9. Remove the two Torx screws securing the soft key panel to the twivel
hat. Proceed to step 10.
Twivel hat
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-17
HD11 Service Manual
Page 204
Removing the Soft Key Panel Assembly
10
10. Grasp the soft key panel assembly at
the arrows (green) where shown; lift
slightly and pull the assembly forward
enough so the ribbon cable can be
disconnected from the rear of the
assembly.
10
11. Disconnect the ribbon cable from
the soft key panel assembly. Proceed
to step 12.
11
Ribbon cable
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-18
HD11 Service Manual
Page 205
Removing the Soft Key Panel
12. Remove the five Torx screws securing the soft key panel to the soft key
housing. Proceed to step 13.
12
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-19
Removing the System Speakers
13 Torx screws (4 plcs)
14
Speaker
Page 206
13. To replace one the the system speakers, remove the four Torx screws
securing the speaker to the control
panel housing.
14. Disconnect the cable from the
speaker.
This completes the soft key panel and
system speakers procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 207
VCR or Color Printer
Figure 10-20
Unstrapping the VCR or Color Printer
➤ To remove the VCR, the color
printer, or both
1
NOTE Removing either peripheral is
essentially the reverse of
installing it.
2
VCR
3
Color printer
1. If there is a peripheral cover (garage)
over the peripheral, unsnap and
remove it.
2. Disconnect all the cables connected
to the peripheral.
3. Unstrap the peripheral and slide it
off the mounting plate.
This completes the VCR and color
printer removal procedure.
Refer to the Dual Peripherals installation
procedure for reinstallation of the VCR
or the color printer.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 208
Peripheral Mounting Plates
Figure 10-21
Removing the Dual or Single Peripheral
Mounting Plate
2
Torx screws
(4 plcs)
➤ To remove the peripheral
mounting plates
Refer to Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-4 for
left and right side panel removal before
proceeding with peripheral mounting
plate removal.
Dual plate
NOTE For clarity, the peripherals are
not shown in the mounted
position on the plate.
1
Mounting
plate
bracket
1. Remove any top-mounted peripherals (see “To remove the VCR, the
color printer, or both” on page 207).
1
Single plate
2. Remove the four Torx screws securing the plate to the mounting plate
bracket.
This completes the peripheral mounting
plate removal procedure.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 209
B&W Printer
Figure 10-22
Removing the Top Cover with a Mounting
Plate Bracket
1
Mounting plate bracket
2
Torx screws
(6 plcs)
➤ To remove the B&W printer
NOTE Refer to Figure 10-3 and
Figure 10-4 for left/right side
panel removal.
the mounting plate bracket to the
top cover. Remove the mounting
bracket.
2. These six Torx screws also secure
the top cover. Feed the cables
through the top cover opening, then
lift and slide the top cover toward
the rear of the system. Proceed to
step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-23
HD11 Service Manual
Page 210
Disconnecting the Printer Cables
3. Disconnect the printer power cord
and the USB cable from the rear of
the printer.
4. Loosen the screw on the printer
bracket.
4
5
3
5. Loosen the OEM strap securing the
printer in the OEM bay. You don’t
need to remove it if you are reinstalling a printer. If you need to remove
the OEM strap, proceed to step 6.
Otherwise, proceed to step 9.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-24
HD11 Service Manual
Page 211
Removing the PC Access Panel
CAUTION Always observe proper
ESD procedures when
servicing the inside of the
PC. Wear a grounded
wrist strap and work on a
static-dissipating mat if
possible.
7
6
Handle
6. There are two twist-locks on the PC
access panel. Turn both the
twist-locks 90 degrees and pull the
access panel open using the handle
on the panel. Do not pull on the
twist-locks.
7. Slide the panel toward the front of
the system to fully remove it from
the PC assembly. Proceed to step 8.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-25
HD11 Service Manual
Page 212
Removing the OEM Strap
8. Carefully pull the OEM strap through
the slots in the top of the PC housing, ensuring that the strap doesn’t
catch on any of the inside PC components. Proceed to step 9.
8
OEM strap
PC access
panel
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-26
HD11 Service Manual
Page 213
Removing the B&W Printer from the OEM
Bay
9. Slide the printer out toward the rear
of the system.
This completes the B&W printer
removal procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
9
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 214
Modem
Figure 10-27
➤ To remove the modem
the PC assembly.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-28
Page 215
Disconnecting the Modem
RJ-45 cable
4
6 7 Modem
4. Disconnect the RJ-45 cable from the
top of the modem.
5. Disconnect the modem USB cable
from the USB port on the back of
the PC assembly.
6. Pull the modem off the Velcro pad.
7. When installing a replacement
modem, place a new piece of Velcro
on the new modem and perform this
procedure in reverse for reassembly.
This completes the modem removal procedure.
USB cable
5
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 216
PC Assembly
Figure 10-29
Disconnecting the PC Cables
➤ To remove the PC assembly
First, refer to the System Enclosures
procedure and perform all steps before
proceeding.
PC assembly
1
2
Next, refer to the To remove the B&W
printer procedure and perform all steps
before proceeding.
2. Disconnect all cables from the rear
of the PC assembly. Note their locations so you can reinstall them properly. Refer to Figure 11-1 and
Figure 11-2 for signal and power
cabling diagrams. Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-30
HD11 Service Manual
Page 217
Locating the PC Mounting Screws
4 Torx screw
6
Left center
panel
Loosen only
3. Locate all nine of the screws that
secure the PC assembly to the cart
and follow the steps below.
4. Remove the one Torx screw that
secures the PC front panel drawer
bracket to the top of the PC case.
5. Remove the three Torx screws
securing the base of the PC assembly
to the cart frame.
6. Loosen the five Torx screws securing
the PC assembly to the left center
panel. Proceed to step 7.
5
Torx screws
(3 plcs)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-31
Screw slots
Page 218
Removing the PC Assembly
7. Slide the PC assembly, approximately
an inch, toward the rear of the system.
8
8. Line up the screw heads with the
two upper screw slots in the PC
assembly bracket and lift the PC off
the cart frame.
7
This completes the PC assembly removal
procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 219
PC Interface Boards
Figure 10-32
➤ To remove the PC interface
boards
the PC assembly.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-33
HD11 Service Manual
Page 220
Removing the PC Access Panel
ESD procedures when
PC. Wear a grounded
possible.
5
4
4
Handle
4. There are two twist-locks on the PC
access panel. Lift both the
twist-locks outward and turn them
90 degrees and pull the access panel
open using the handle on the panel.
Do not pull on the twist-locks.
5. Slide the panel toward the front of
the system to fully remove it from
the PC assembly. Proceed to step 6.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-34
HD11 Service Manual
Page 221
Disconnecting the PC Rear Panel Cables
6.
Disconnect the PC rear panel cables
connected to the PC boards that are
to be removed. Proceed to step 7.
CAUTION
PC rear panel
6
See “Primary System PCB
Names and Locations (PC)”
on page 317.
Do not connect the auxiliary power cable
453561175221 to the
E-box Interface Board
connector located on the
back of the PC. Doing so
will destroy the rear I/O
panel Video I/O card. See
Figure 11-1 for proper
cabling of the system.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-35
HD11 Service Manual
Page 222
Disconnecting the Internal PC Cables
7.
E-box interface
board
7 Physio trigger
cable
The E-box Interface board is the
only board with internal cable connections. The physio trigger cable
assembly connects to this board.
Proceed to step 8.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-36
Page 223
Removing the PC Boards
8
NOTE All the boards can be removed
individually without too much
difficulty with exception of the
Hauppauge Video Capture
board Figure 10-37 and the
Graphics board Figure 10-38.
Graphics board
Hauppauge video
capture board
8. Before proceeding, check that the
PC rear panel cables are disconnected from the boards you want to
remove.
9
10
9. Remove the one panhead screw
securing the board to the PC connection slot.
10. Gently pull and slightly wiggle the
board until it releases from the
motherboard connector.
This completes the PC boards removal
procedure.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-37
Page 224
Removing the E-box Interface Board
Hauppauge video
capture board
3
1
E-box Interface
board
NOTE If you are removing the Hauppauge Video Capture board,
the E-box Interface board
should be removed first for
easier accessibility to the Video
Capture board.
➤ To remove the E-box Interface
board
1. Disconnect the two cables connected to the E-box Interface board
on the PC rear panel.
2. Disconnect the Physio Trigger cable.
2
Physio Trigger cable
3. Remove the one panhead screw
securing the board to the PC connection slot.
This completes the E-box interface
board removal procedure.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-38
Page 225
Removing the Graphics Board
2
1
Graphics board
➤ To remove the Graphics board
1. The Graphics board is in the top
slot (AGP connector). Disconnect
the one cable connected to the
Graphics board on the PC rear
panel.
2.
Remove the one panhead screw
securing the board to the PC connection slot. Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-39
HD11 Service Manual
Page 226
Graphics Board in Locked Position
3.
Graphics board
3
Connector locking tab
Locate the connector locking tab on
the right side of the AGP motherboard connector. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-40
HD11 Service Manual
Page 227
Graphics Board Connector and Locking Tab
4. Press down on the connector locking tab and simultaneously pull the
Graphics board outward until it
releases from the motherboard connector.
This completes the Graphics board
removal procedure.
Return to step 8, on page 223 to remove
other PC boards.
of 2).
Motherboard connector for Graphics board
4
Connector locking tab
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 228
E-box Assembly
Figure 10-41
Locating the E-box Mounting Screws
➤ To remove the E-box assembly
3 screws
1 Torx screws
(10 plcs)
NOTE You can perform most E-box
service without removing the
E-box from the system. To perform service that does require
removing the E-box, you must
also remove the power supply.
proceeding.
Next, refer to the Power Supply procedure and perform all steps before proceeding.
4 screws
3 screws
1. Locate all 10 of the screws that
secure the E-box assembly to the
cart frame and remove them. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-42
HD11 Service Manual
Page 229
Removing the E-box Assembly
2. Lift the E-box assembly off the cart
frame.
This completes the E-box assembly
removal procedure.
2
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 230
E-box Card Cage Boards
Figure 10-43
➤ To remove the E-box boards
NOTE You can perform most E-box
service without removing the
E-box from the system. Refer
to the E-box Assembly for the
removal procedure.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-44
HD11 Service Manual
Page 231
Disconnecting the Token Ring Cable
CAUTION The token ring cable connectors are easily damaged. Be gentle when
connecting and disconnecting the cable.
4
4
Release tab
Release tab
4. Disconnect the Token Ring cable
from the Signal Processor Board by
squeezing the release tabs at the top
and bottom of the cable connector
and pulling the connector out of the
slot. Proceed to step 5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-45
HD11 Service Manual
Page 232
Removing the E-box Access Panel
Twist-lock
5
Twist-lock
Handle
ESD procedures when
PC. Wear a grounded
possible.
5. There are two twist-locks on the
E-box access panel. Lift both the
Do not pull on the twist-locks. Proceed to step 6.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-46
Page 233
Removing the E-box Boards
6. To remove the Signal Processor
Board, disconnect the power supply
ribbon cable from the Signal Processor Board connector.
Power supply
ribbon cable
6
Signal processor
board connector
8
8
7. To remove the Motor Controller or
one of the TR boards from the E-box
assembly, pull the card retainers outward till you feel the board release
from the backplane board.
8. Carefully slide the board(s) out of
the card cage and place them on a
static-dissipating mat.
This completes the E-box boards
removal procedure.
7
Card retainer
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 234
Figure 10-47
Removing the Signal Distribution Board and
Backplane Board Ribbon Cable
1
Signal Distribution
to Backplane board
ribbon cable
Power supply cavity
E-box
➤ To remove the Signal Distribution Board
First, refer to the E-box Card Cage
Boards procedure and perform all steps
before proceeding.
Next, refer to the Power Supply procedure and perform step 7 through
step 10 before proceeding.
1. Disconnect the small ribbon cable
connected to the Signal Distribution
and Backplane boards. Access is
through the power supply cavity in
the lower section of the E-box. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-48
HD11 Service Manual
Page 235
NOTE Both side panels must be
front panel.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-49
HD11 Service Manual
Page 236
Removing the Front Panel
the front panel enclosure.
4
5. Pull the panel straight out from the
front of the system. Proceed to
step 6.
5
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-50
Page 237
Removing the Transducer Connector
Modules
NOTE All of the transducer connector modules must be removed
before the Signal Distribution
Board can be removed.
6. Remove the four Torx screws securing the connector module bezel and
connector case.
8
7. Remove the module bezel.
7
9
6
8. Pull the connector case outward to
disconnect it from the Signal Distribution Board and slide it out of the
E-box assembly.
9. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the
remaining connector modules. Proceed to step 10.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-51
Page 238
Removing the Signal Distribution Board
10. Remove the eight Torx screws securing the Signal Distribution Board to
the inside of the E-box assembly.
11. Lift and swing the bottom of the Signal Distribution Board outward to
remove it from the E-box assembly.
This completes the Signal Distribution
Board removal procedure.
reassembly.
10
of 2).
Torx screws
(8 plcs)
Right side panel not
shown for clarity
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 239
Backplane Board
Figure 10-52
Removing the Signal Distribution and
Backplane Board Ribbon Cable
1
Signal Distribution
to Backplane board
ribbon cable
Power supply cavity
E-box
➤ To remove the Backplane board
First, refer to the E-box Card Cage
Boards procedure and perform all steps
before proceeding.
Next, refer to the Power Supply procedure and perform step 7 through
step 10 before proceeding.
1. Disconnect the small ribbon cable
connected to the Signal Distribution
and Backplane boards. Access is
through the power supply cavity in
the lower section of the E-box. Proceed to step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-53
HD11 Service Manual
Page 240
Removing the Vertical Card Cage Septum
2. Remove the four Torx screws securing the vertical septum to the rear of
the E-box card cage.
3. Slide the septum out of the card
cage. Proceed to step 4.
2
3
Torx
screws
(4 plcs)
Vertical card cage septum
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-54
HD11 Service Manual
Page 241
Removing the Lower Card Guide
4. Remove the two Torx screws securing the lower card guide to the rear
of the E-box card cage.
5. Slide the lower card guide out of the
card cage. Proceed to step 6.
5
4
Torx
screws
(2 plcs)
Lower card guide
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-55
HD11 Service Manual
Page 242
Removing the Backplane Board
the Backplane board to the inside of
the E-box assembly.
7. Slide the Backplane board out of the
E-box card cage.
This completes the Backplane board
removal procedure.
reassembly.
7
6
Torx screws
(6 plcs)
of 2).
Left side panel not
shown for clarity
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 243
Power Supply
Figure 10-56
➤ To remove the power supply
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
3
1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-57
HD11 Service Manual
Page 244
Disconnecting the Token Ring Cable
CAUTION The token ring cable connectors are easily damaged. Be gentle when
connecting and disconnecting the cable.
4
4
Release tab
Release tab
4. Disconnect the Token Ring cable
from the Signal Processor Board by
squeezing the release tabs at the top
and bottom of the cable connector
and pulling the connector out of the
slot. Proceed to step 5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-58
HD11 Service Manual
Page 245
Removing the E-box Access Panel
Twist-lock
6
Power
supply
ribbon
cable
ESD procedures when
PC. Wear a grounded
possible.
5. There are two twist-locks on the
E-box access panel. Lift both the
Do not pull on the twist-locks.
Twist-lock
5
Handle
6. Disconnect the power supply ribbon
cable from the Signal Processor
Board. Proceed to step 7.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-59
HD11 Service Manual
Page 246
Disconnecting the Power Cord Cables
7. Disconnect the four power cord
cables from the side of the power
supply.
8
Fan assemblies power
PC power
Peripherals power
7
B&W printer power
Monitor power
NOTE Reconnect these cables in the
same locations. The top receptacle slot is for the PC power
cord connection.
8. Disconnect the two fan assembly
power cables. Proceed to step 9.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-60
HD11 Service Manual
Page 247
Removing the Power Supply Retaining Screws
9. Remove the four Torx screws securing the power supply to the E-box
frame. Proceed to step 10.
9
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-61
HD11 Service Manual
Page 248
Removing the Power Supply
NOTE Ensure that the power supply
ribbon cable slides out with the
power supply. The cable shielding may catch on the E-box
frame during this process.
Power supply ribbon cable
10 Handle
10. Grasp the power supply handle and
firmly pull the power supply out of
the E-box housing.
This completes the power supply
removal procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 249
Rear I/O Assembly and Video I/O Board
Figure 10-62
Removing the Left and Right Side Panels
NOTE Both side panels must be
rear I/O assembly.
remove it.
2
Torx screws
(2 plcs)
4
3
1
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for right
side panel removal. Proceed to
step 5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-63
HD11 Service Manual
Page 250
Disconnecting the Rear Vent and Rear I/O
Assembly
7
5
5
6
6. Remove the two Torx screws securing the bottom of the rear vent
assembly.
7. Remove the four Torx screws (two
each side) securing the top of the
rear vent assembly.
8
7
5. Using a Torx-end screwdriver, insert
the screwdriver into the two access
holes in the rear vent assembly (indicated by the green arrows) and
loosen both screws. Do not remove
these two screws.
8. Slide the rear vent (with Rear I/O
assembly attached) out of the cart
frame. Proceed to step 9.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-64
Page 251
Removing the Rear Vent and Faceplate
Cables
9
10 Torx screws
Splitter can
(4 plcs)
Standoff
screws
(2 plcs)
14
11
13
9. Pull the modem off the velcro strip
on the side of the splitter can.
10. Remove the four Torx screws securing the rear vent to the Rear I/O
faceplate.
11. Remove the two standoff screws
securing the serial connector to the
Rear I/O faceplate. Remove the
cable.
12. Remove the two Torx screws securing the USB connector to the Rear
I/O faceplate. Remove the cable.
Rear vent
13. Disconnect the LAN cable from the
back of the Rear I/O faceplate.
Rear I/O faceplate
14. Disconnect the five remaining cables
from the back of the Rear I/O splitter can. Proceed to step 15.
12
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-65
HD11 Service Manual
Page 252
Removing the Rear I/O Faceplate
15
Standoff screws (4 plcs)
15. Remove the four standoff screws
securing the two Video I/O board
connectors to the Rear I/O faceplate.
16. Remove the three nuts and washers
securing the three Video I/O board
BNC connectors to the Rear I/O
faceplate.
17. Remove the Rear I/O faceplate by
sliding it off of the Video I/O board
connectors. Proceed to step 18.
16
Video I/O
board
17
Nut and washer (3 plcs)
Rear I/O faceplate
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-66
HD11 Service Manual
Page 253
Removing the Video I/O Board
Standoff
screws
(8 plcs)
18
19
18. To remove the Video I/O board from
the Rear I/O splitter can, remove all
eight standoff screws securing the
four connectors at the rear of the
splitter can.
19. Slide the Video I/O board out of the
splitter can.
This completes the Rear I/O assembly
and Video I/O board removal procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 254
Lift Column Gas Strut
Figure 10-67
Raising the Control Panel Module
➤ To remove the lift column gas
strut
Refer to System Enclosures for system
enclosures removal and perform all the
steps before proceeding.
1
Handle
1. Raise the control panel to its full
height by pressing both handle triggers and simultaneously pulling
upward on the handle. Proceed to
step 2.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-68
Page 255
Rotating and Supporting the Control Panel
Module
2. Rotate the control panel 90 degrees,
(toward the left facing the system).
Rotating the control panel allows
easier access for removing the lift
column gas strut.
3
2
Support
NOTE When preparing to remove the
lift column gas strut, a support
must be placed under the control panel assembly to support
the weight that is carried on
the lift column.
3. Place a support between the control
panel assembly and the top of the
cart. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-69
Page 256
Opening the Metal Front Cover
4. Loosen the four hex nuts securing
the metal front cover.
5. Pull the top of the cover out from
the frame and swing it downward.
The metal front cover can be
removed if necessary. Proceed to
step 6.
Metal front cover
5
4
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-70
Page 257
Removing the Gas Strut from the Ball Stud
6. Pull the end of the keeper pin outward (right side of gas strut ball
socket).
Keeper pin
7. Rotate the keeper pin (counterclockwise).
8
8. Slide the pin down until it comes out
of the ball socket holes.
9. Pull the gas strut off of the ball stud.
Proceed to step 10.
7
Ball stud
Ball socket
6
9
Keeper pin
(pull here)
Gas strut
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-71
Page 258
Removing the Gas Strut from the Lock
Bracket
10. Unscrew the gas strut (counterclockwise) until it releases from the
eyelet on the lock bracket. The gas
strut is now removed. Proceed to
step 11.
Ball stud and bracket
10
Gas strut
Lock bracket
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-72
HD11 Service Manual
Page 259
Installing the Gas Strut into the Lock Bracket
11. Using a long-neck screwdriver, rotate
the lock bracket eyelet upward until
you see the screw hole. Hold it in
that position.
12
Eyelet (push
here to rotate)
Lock bracket
11
12. Screw the gas strut (clockwise) into
the lock bracket eyelet until it is
snug. Proceed to step 13.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-73
HD11 Service Manual
Page 260
Inserting the Gas Strut onto the Ball Stud
13. Press the gas strut ball socket onto
the ball stud.
13 Ball stud
14. Insert the keeper pin through the
two holes in the ball socket.
15
14
14
15. Rotate the keeper pin (clockwise)
around the shaft and snap it into
place.
This completes the gas strut removal
and reassembly procedure.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 261
Fan Assemblies
Figure 10-74
Disconnecting the Fan Power Cables
➤ To remove the fan assemblies
There are two air cooling fan assemblies;
one below the PC and one below the
E-box.
proceeding.
Next, refer to the B&W Printer procedure (PC removal only) and perform all
steps before proceeding.
2
Fan power cables
1
Next, refer to the PC Assembly procedure or the E-box Assembly procedure
(depending on which fan assembly you
are removing) and perform all the steps
before proceeding.
2. Disconnect the appropriate fan
power cable from the power supply.
Proceed to step 3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-75
HD11 Service Manual
Page 262
Unhooking the Fan Power Cable from the
Cable Retainer
Cable retainer
3. Unhook the fan power cable from
the cable retainer located at the rear
of the cart frame.
3
NOTE This step is the same for either
the single PC fan or the two
E-box fans.
Cable
Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-76
HD11 Service Manual
Page 263
Removing the Fan Assembly
4. Lift the fan assembly out of the cart
recess. There is no hardware securing the fan assembly.
NOTE This step is the same for either
the PC or the E-box fan assembly.
4
This completes the fan assembly removal
procedure.
reassembly.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 264
Fan Air Filter
Figure 10-77
Removing the Fan Air Filter
➤ To remove the fan air filter
2
1
Filter handle
(both sides)
“UP” side of filter
NOTE The filter can be removed from
either side of the system chassis.
1. Locate the filter handle and pull the
filter straight out of the filter guides.
2. To install the filter, slide the filter
into the filter guides with the “UP”
on the handles facing toward the top
of the system.
This completes the fan filter removal and
reassembly procedure.
NOTE System shown tilted for
illustration clarity.
Bottom of
system
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 265
System Casters
Figure 10-78
Preparing the System for Caster
Replacement
➤ To remove a system caster
2
WARNINGThe following steps
1
require that the system
be in a tilted position. To
reduce the risk of injury
or system damage from
toppling, the monitor
should be removed
before tilting the system.
2. Remove the monitor (see “Monitor” on page 195).
3
2
3
3. Carefully tilt the system and prop it
up with a solid object that provides
adequate clearance for caster
removal. Proceed to step 4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-79
HD11 Service Manual
Page 266
Removing a System Caster
NOTE System shown tilted for
illustration clarity.
4. Remove the four hexhead bolts
securing the caster to the cart weldment.
This completes the removal procedure
for a single caster. Repeat as neccessary
for other casters.
reassembly.
of 2).
4
Hexhead bolts (4 plcs)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 267
Crating the HD11 Ultrasound System
Figure 10-80
Removing the Monitor
➤ To crate the HD11 Ultrasound
System
NOTE You must order the shipping
crate (P/N 453563468821)
before proceeding with this
crating procedure. This package contains all the hardware
necessary for proper shipping.
1
2
1. Remove the monitor connector
cover.
2. Disconnect the power and audio
cables.
3. Lift up the release lever under the
front bezel of the monitor and slide
the monitor off of the monitor base.
3
4. Package the monitor in a Philips
monitor box (BoxMaker # 3500419)
and HD11 monitor inserts. Proceed
to step 5.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-81
HD11 Service Manual
Page 268
Rotating the Control Panel
5
Triggers
5
Rotate 180 degrees
5. Press both of the control panel triggers and rotate the control panel
180 degrees. The control panel handle should be at the rear of the system.
6. Release the triggers and move the
control panel slightly until you feel it
lock in place. Proceed to step 7.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-82
HD11 Service Manual
Page 269
Installing the Control Panel Spacer
7. Remove the rectangular perforated
tear-off from the bottom of the control panel spacer.
7
Spacer
8
8. Place the spacer at the base of the
control panel column. Proceed to
step 9.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-83
HD11 Service Manual
Page 270
Supporting the Control Panel
10
Monitor mount
9. Press both of the control panel triggers and lower the control panel so
it rests on the control panel spacer.
10. Ensure that the monitor mount is
oriented so that the cables are leading away from the control panel. Proceed to step 11.
9
Spacer
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-84
HD11 Service Manual
Page 271
Covering the System with an Antistatic Bag
11. Place an antistatic bag over the system and adjust the bag so that there
is ample slack on all four sides. This
is critical in order for the system
hold-down brace to fit properly.
NOTE With the exception of the casters, the bag must cover every
part of the system that contacts the crate.
Proceed to step 12.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-85
HD11 Service Manual
Page 272
Preparing the Crate
13
12. Place the crate ramp in front of the
crate opening with the beveled edge
positioned at the lower end and facing up.
13. From under the crate cross brace,
remove the perforated tear-out from
the two foot rest foam pieces. Proceed to step 14.
12
13
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-86
Page 273
Locking the Swivel-Lock Casters
14
Green tab
14. Press the green tab on both front
swivel-lock casters to lock them. The
tabs should be facing outward from
the system. Proceed to step 15.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-87
HD11 Service Manual
Page 274
Loading the System onto the Crate
15. Facing the control panel handle (rear
of system), push the system up the
ramp and onto the crate. The system
front foot rests should fit under the
crate foam hold-downs at the rear of
the crate. Proceed to step 16.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-88
HD11 Service Manual
Page 275
Rotating the Rear Casters
Before
rotation
After
rotation
16. Lift (slightly) the rear of the system
and rotate the rear casters
180 degrees so they face the front of
the system. Proceed to step 17.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-89
HD11 Service Manual
Page 276
Placing the Wheel Chock
17. Place the wheel chock board in
behind the casters with the beveled
side up and toward the casters. Proceed to step 18.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-90
HD11 Service Manual
Page 277
Preparing the System Hold-down Brace
18. Remove the large center perforated
tear-out section on the inside of the
system hold-down brace. Proceed to
step 19.
Tear-out section of brace
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 10-91
Page 278
Installing the System Hold-down Brace
19. Install the system hold-down brace
beneath the control panel so that the
mounting bolt holes are facing outward from the system. Proceed to
step 20.
Bolt holes
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-92
HD11 Service Manual
Page 279
Placing the Ramp
20. Turn the ramp around and place the
ramp into the pallet with beveled
edge up and facing outward. Proceed
to step 21.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-93
HD11 Service Manual
Page 280
Installing the Ramp Bolts
21. Install two 9/16-inch bolts to secure
the ramp to the pallet. Use the supplied T-nuts (tines facing the wood).
Proceed to step 22.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-94
HD11 Service Manual
Page 281
Installing the Hold-down Brace Bolts
22. Install two 9/16-inch bolts to secure
the hold-down brace to the top-side
of the ramp. Use the supplied T-nuts
(tines facing the wood). Proceed to
step 23.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-95
HD11 Service Manual
Page 282
Placing the First Corrugated Wrap
23. Place all boxed manuals, cables, and
other items around the system on
the pallet.
NOTE If the system is being shipped
with an external VCR or
printer, place it at the front of
the system under the monitor
mount.
24. Fit the first tri-fold corrugated wrap
into the retainers at the outside edge
of the pallet.
NOTE Printed side of the corrugated
wrap faces outward.
Proceed to step 25.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-96
HD11 Service Manual
Page 283
Placing the Second Corrugated Wrap
25. Fit the second tri-fold corrugated
wrap (opposite side) into the retainers at the corners of the pallet.
NOTE Printed side of the corrugated
wrap faces outward.
Proceed to step 26.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-97
HD11 Service Manual
Page 284
Taping the Seams on the Corrugated Wrap
26. Secure each of the two corner seams
with strapping tape. Proceed to
step 27.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-98
HD11 Service Manual
Page 285
Placing the Monitor Mount Top Cap
27. Place the monitor top cap on the
monitor mount and remove the perforated tear-out on the three crossing support sections. Proceed to
step 28.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-99
HD11 Service Manual
Page 286
Placing the Corrugated Top Cover
28. Place the corrugated top cover on
the crated container. The cover fits
over all four sides of the tri-fold
wraps. Proceed to step 29.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 10-100
HD11 Service Manual
Page 287
Banding the System Crate
Plastic strapping bands
29. Band the crated system from the
side with two plastic bands.
This completes the crating procedure.
of 2).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
11
HD11 Service Manual
Page 288
Cabling: Introduction
Cabling
Introduction
This section contains system cabling and connector information. Use the illustrations (figures)
and parts tables in this section to locate and identify system cables and their part numbers. Part
numbers are shown on the illustrations and are listed and described in the corresponding tables.
NOTE Cable part numbers are located on at least one end of the cables.
CAUTION
Do not connect the auxiliary power cable 453561175221 to the E-box Interface Board connector located on the back of the PC. Doing so will destroy the Rear I/O panel Video I/O card. See
Figure 11-1 for proper cabling of the system.
System
Cabling
Diagrams
System signal interconnect and power distribution cabling diagrams are shown in Figure 11-1 and
Figure 11-2, with HD11 PC internal cabling details shown in Figure 11-3. For reference, system-to-peripheral connection diagrams are provided in Figure 11-4 through Figure 11-6.
Cable Part
Numbers
Table 11-1 is a parts list of the interconnect cables shown in Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-3.
Table 11-2 is a parts list of the power distribution cables shown in Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.
Refer to Table 14-3 for additional information on peripherals and applicable cables.
System
Connectors
Figure 11-7 through Figure 11-13 are illustrations of the system primary connector assemblies.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 11-1
Page 289
Cabling: Foldouts
HD11 Ultrasound System Signal Interconnect Diagram
Upper I/O panel (rear view)
Video monitor
Video I/O B
8
20
See CAUTION
19
Backplane PCB
(Inside E-box)
Signal Distribution PCB
(Inside E-box)
10
Auxiliary power
connector
See CAUTION
Video I/O A
5 int or 4 ext
PC
5 int or 4 ext
E-box
2
2
15
15
11
To VCR
21
16
To B&W printer
To color printer
16
13
13
To
peripheral
tray
VCR (Video In)
13
19
3
See Figure 11-16
for control panel
cable locations
18
19
10
19
Keyboard
14
VCR (Video Out)
For PC internal
signal cabling,
See Figure 11-3
18
18
14
Power
supply
Phone cable is part of modem
Modem
To peripheral tray
VCR Audio In Right (red)
17
See CAUTION
VCR Audio In Left (white)
VCR Audio Out Right (red)
VCR Audio Out Left (white)
(Rear view)
Lower I/O panel
17
USB cable is part
of modem
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-2
HD11 Service Manual
Page 290
Cabling: Foldouts
HD11 Ultrasound System Power Interconnect Diagram
PC
E-box/Power supply
23
Speaker housing
Video monitor
Control panel
See Figure 11-16
for control panel
cable locations
12
Ground GRN/YEL
35
22
To
peripheral
tray
37
23
E-box fans
23
B&W printer
22
PC fan
35
(Rear view)
(Side view)
See Table 11-2 for all system power cords
28 (U.S.)
To power source
Auxiliary power
connector,
See Figure 11-1 for
cable connections
For PC internal power
cabling, See Figure 11-3
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 291
Cabling: Foldouts
HD11 PC Internal Cabling Diagram
PC
36
23
Power receptacle
Power
Signal
9
DVD drive
PC power supply
J5B1
+12V PWR
To
system power
supply
(Upper receptacle)
J3J1
PWR
Power
Upper
36
J2F1
Reset
Lower
J9J1
7
USB
USB J9H1
CPU fan
Aux pwr
User
interface
6
Physio
module
Trigger
36
36
Power
Signal
9
MOD
USB
9
9
J6J1
USB
USB
J9F1
J6J2
USB
PC Motherboard
Hard
drive
6
E-box Interface card
Signal
Rear I/O
panel
36
36
Power
9
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Cable Table
Part Numbers
Page 292
Cabling: Cable Table Part Numbers
Included in the tables that follow are two columns of cable part numbers. Some cables have numbers listed in both columns. This is required due to varying SAP clients located in various geographical locations. If there is only one number on the line item you are looking for, then that is
the number you use. Refer to Parts Table Definitions for Legacy/12NC part number information.
Cable Parts
List
Table 11-1
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
HD11 System Signal Interconnect Cables
12NC
Part Number
1
2
M2540-69200
453563468691
453561152771
3
M2540-69050
4
M2540-69080
No part number
as of 1/20/05
453563470861
5
6
M2540-69130
M2540-69030
453563470901
453563468661
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
Cable Assy, Audio In/Out
Cable Assy, External I/O USB
(Extension)
Cable Assy, Keyboard Aux Power
Not Shown
System Diagram: Figure 11-1
Cable Assy, LAN, External, 10-ft
Cable Assy, LAN, Internal
Cable Assy, Physio Trigger
Cable Illustration: Figure 11-16
For external connections
Included in the accessory box
shipped with the system,
Figure 14-31
Part of PC assembly (Internal)
See Table 14-2 for option kits
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-1
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
Page 293
Cabling: Cable Parts List
HD11 System Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
12NC
Part Number
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
7
453561153761
Cable Assy, Physio USB
8
453561153981
Cable Assy, Ribbon, 10-pin
453563470801
453561181041
453563468681
No part number
as of 1/20/05
No part number
as of 1/20/05
Cable Assy, Ribbon
Cable Assy, RS-232 Extension
Cable Assy, Serial, VCR
Cable Assy, Speaker
Cable Assy, System Line Audio,
Keyboard
453563468641
Cable Assy, Token Ring
See Table 14-2 for option kits
E-box interface cable between
Signal Distribution and Backplane
boards
Used for keyboard and
microphone connection
Parts info: Figure 14-5
9
10
11
12
M2540-67160
13
M2540-69060
14
M2540-69000
M2540-69090
M2540-69010
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-1
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
Page 294
12NC
Part Number
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
Keyboard
Figure 14-31
2 cable assemblies used
Printer Diagram: Figure 11-5 and
Figure 11-6
VCR Diagram: Figure 11-4
2 cable assemblies used
Alt 3500-3596-01
15
M2540-69110
453563470881
Cable Assy, USB, 10-ft
16
M2540-69100
453563470871
Cable Assy, USB, Printer
453561194602
Cable Assy, VCR, Audio In/Out
453563468671
Cable Assy, VCR, Video In/Out
17
18
19
M2540-69070
453561175211
Cable Assy, Video I/O A, Alt1
Heed CAUTION: on page 288
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-1
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
20
21
M2540-69040
Page 295
12NC
Part Number
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
453561175221
Cable Assy, Video I/O B, Alt1
Heed CAUTION: on page 288
Cable Assy, Video, Monitor
453563493821
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-2
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
22
M2540-69170
23
8120-2572
Page 296
HD11 System Power Distribution Cables
12NC
Part Number
No part number
as of 1/20/05
453563198571
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
Cable Assy, Ground (GND)
PC power (Qty 1 cable)
Cable Assy, DTCHBL-CDSTS,
16-Awg, 3 Cond, 48-In Long
NOTE PC power cable must be
connected to the top
receptacle on the
power supply.
24
25
M2540-60900
453561172891
453563468451
26
M2540-60901
453563468461
27
M2540-60902
453563468471
Cable Assy, LED
Cable Assy, Power Cord, UK,
Singapore, Hong Kong
Cable Assy, Power Cord, Australia,
New Zealand
Cable Assy, Power Cord, Europe
Peripheral power (Qty 1 cable)
System Diagram: Figure 11-2 and
Figure 11-3
Printer Diagram: Figure 11-5
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-2
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
28
M2540-60903
Page 297
HD11 System Power Distribution Cables (Continued)
12NC
Part Number
453563468481
29
M2540-60906
453563468491
30
M2540-60912
453563468501
31
M2540-60917
453563468511
32
33
M2540-60919
M2540-60920
453563468521
453563468531
34
35
M2540-60922
M2540-69180
453563468541
No part number
as of 1/20/05
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
Cable Assy, Power Cord, US,
Canada, Japan
Figure 14-31
Cable Assy, Power Cord,
Switzerland, Lietensteinch
Cable Assy, Power Cord, Denmark,
Greenland
Cable Assy, Power Cord, South
Africa, India
Cable Assy, Power Cord, Israel,
Cable Assy, Power Cord, Argentina
Cable Assy, Power Cord, China
Cable Assy, Power, Monitor
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 11-2
Item Legacy
No. Part Number
Page 298
HD11 System Power Distribution Cables (Continued)
12NC
Part Number
36
453561152731
37
453561179211
Cable Description
Notes/Reference
Cable Assy, Power, PC
(with power switch)
Cable Assy, Power, Y Type, 6-ft, 10A,
C14/2 C13
Printer Diagram: Figure 11-6
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 299
Cabling: Peripheral Cabling Diagrams
Peripheral
Cabling
Diagrams
Figure 11-4
HS-MD3000U/E Mitsubishi VCR Cabling Diagram
HD11 PC rear panel
Upper I/O panel (rear)
18
18
HS-MD3000U/E VCR
Power supply
37
18
17
17
Note: Line in is blue connector, line out is green connector
17
17
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 300
UP-D895MD Sony Digital B&W Printer Cabling Diagram
HD11 PC rear panel
16
Power supply
UP-D895MD printer
23
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 11-6
Page 301
UP-D23MD Sony Digital Color Printer Cabling Diagram
HD11 PC rear panel
Power supply
37
16
UP-D23MD printer
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 302
Cabling: System Connector Illustrations
System
Connector
Illustrations
Figure 11-7
HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Front Panel)
CD drive or DVD drive
ECG input connector
Magneto-optical
disk (MOD) drive
Phone plug jack
Hard disk drive light
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-8
HD11 Service Manual
Page 303
HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Rear Panel)
Power receptacle
Power On/Off switch
Auxiliary power connector
USB port
Motherboard connectors
See Figure 11-9
USB port
USB port
TVIEW Gold Video
Converter card connectors
Radeon 7000 Graphics card connectors
Serial Interface (RS-232) card connectors
Hauppauge Video Capture
card connectors
E-box Interface Board connectors
Sound card connectors
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-9
HD11 Service Manual
Page 304
HD11 System Connector Locations (PC Motherboard Connectors)
Mouse (Not used)
Keyboard (Not used)
USB port
USB port
Serial port
Parallel port (Not used)
Video connector (Not used)
USB ports
Line out
Microphone
LAN connector
Line in (Not used)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-10
HD11 Service Manual
Page 305
HD11 System Connector Locations (E-Box Front Panel)
Cartridge connector
Cartridge connector
Explora connector
Explora connector
CW/pencil probe connector
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-11
HD11 Service Manual
Page 306
HD11 System Connector Locations (E-Box/Power Supply Rear Panel)
E-Box
Token Ring cable connector
See Figure 13-2
PC power receptacle
OEM power receptacle
B&W printer power receptacle
Chassis fan connector
System power cord receptacle
Monitor power receptacle
Chassis fan connector
Power supply
Side view of power supply
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 11-12
Page 307
HD11 System Connector Locations (Upper Rear I/O Panel on Back of System)
Foot switch and
print trigger
External VGA
Foot switch
Aux pwr (PS) and
composite and S-video
(TVIEW card)
RS-232
RS-232 Serial port
S-Video (DIN)
S-Video (To VCR)
See Figure 13-3
B&W composite video
RJ-45 LAN feedthrough
connector
RJ-45 LAN
Color composite video
Aux power (To Kybdb)
USB port
USB port
Print trigger output
VGA (To monitor)
Front of I/O panel
Back of I/O panel
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 11-13
Page 308
HD11 System Connector Locations (Lower Rear I/O Panel on Back of System)
System ground
Equipotential ground lug
Telephone line jack
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-14
See Figure 11-16
for control panel
cable locations
HD11 Service Manual
Page 309
HD11 Control Panel PCB Cable Connector Locations
J2 USB
J9 Keyboard line audio
J3 LED
J1 Keyboard
auxilary power
J4 Speaker
Trackball
Trackball cable
connector
J6 Soft key ribbon
connector
Slide
pot
board
Ground screw
(Yellow/Green)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 310
Cabling: Miscellaneous Cable Illustrations
Miscellaneous
Cable
Illustrations
Figure 11-15 is an illustration of the Backplane-to-Signal Distribution Board cable. Figure 11-16 is
an illustration of the control panel cables. Figure 11-17 through Figure 11-18 are illustrations of
the system power cords.
Figure 11-15
Backplane-to-Signal Distribution Board Ribbon Cable, E-box (453561153981)
Backplane PCB
10-pin ribbon cable
(behind Backplane PCB)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-16
See Figure 11-14
for control panel
PCB connector
locations
3
15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 311
Control Panel Cable Locations
22
Soft key ribbon
cable
12
24
13
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-17
HD11 Service Manual
Page 312
System to Source Power Cord, US, Canada, Japan (M2540-60903)
146 ± 2 Inches
System
Power
source
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 11-18
HD11 Service Manual
Page 313
System to Source Power Cords
146 ± 2 Inches
System
Power
source
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
12
HD11 Service Manual
Page 314
Change History: Introduction
Change History
Introduction
This section summarizes the software and hardware changes associated with specific software
releases. Unless noted under “Hardware Changes,” hardware changes do not always accompany
a software release. See Section 13, “Configuration” for part numbers of the released software
versions. Any hardware part number additions or changes, not dependent on software compatibility, that accompany these releases are incorporated into Section 14, “Parts”.
Initial System
Release
(v1.0)
Philips Ultrasound released the HD11 Ultrasound System for customer orders in February 2005.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
13
HD11 Service Manual
Page 315
Configuration: Introduction
Configuration
Introduction
This section lists all of the released software version part numbers for the system, identifies the
primary system PCBs, and shows where these PCBs are located in the system. When applicable,
additional PCB reference information is provided.
This section also contains configuration information such as the as-shipped system BIOS settings,
hard disk drive jumper positions, and the Philips-recommended settings for the optional OEM
peripherals sold with the system.
Compatibility
Information
Call your Philips representative for the core information you need to determine the compatibility of primary system PCBs and certain hardware assemblies with respect to the system software
releases.
NOTE At power on, the system conducts a check of the transducer connector modules and
the TR boards to determine if they are the correct type for the system: If one (or
more) of these boards is not the correct type for the system, an error message is displayed and the system is prevented from imaging. (See “Incompatible Hardware Shutdown Error” on page 176.)
System
Software
Software releases and corresponding part numbers are listed in Table 13-1. See Section 13,
“Configuration” for a summarized history of the software and hardware changes associated with
specific software releases.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 13-1
Page 316
Configuration: Primary PCB Information
Software Part Numbers
989605346091
SW, HD11 System
453561188495
1.0.0 SW, System Application Files, HD11, Virtual
453561188511
OS.03, SW, HD11, Virtual
453561188541
COTS.09, SW, COTS, Virtual
CDs
Primary PCB
Information
453561188485
1.0.0, SW, System Application Files, HD11
453561188501
OS.03, SW (2 CDs)
453561188531
COTS.09, SW
The HD11 primary PCB locations are shown in Figure 13-1 (PC), Figure 13-2 (E-box), and
Figure 13-3 (Rear Upper I/O panel). These PCBs are shown in Figure 13-4 through Figure 13-18.
There are no PCB PROMs or PCB jumpers that are required to be configured in the field.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 317
Primary System PCB Names and Locations (PC)
PC rear connector names and locations
See Figure 11-8
Compatibility
Information
Motherboard PCB
See Figure 13-4
Graphics PCB
See Figure 13-5
TVIEW Gold Video Converter PCB
See Figure 13-6
Serial Interface card
See Figure 13-7
Hauppauge Video Capture PCB
See Figure 13-8
E-box Interface PCB
See Figure 13-9
Sound Card
See Figure 13-10
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-2
HD11 Service Manual
Primary System PCB Names and Locations (E-Box)
E-box/power supply rear connector
names and locations
See Figure 11-11
Signal Processor PCB
See Figure 13-14
3D Motor Controller PCB
(Galil Motion Control)
See Figure 13-15
Compatibility
Information
Page 318
Signal Distribution PCB
See Figure 13-12 and Figure 13-13
Backplane PCB
See Figure 13-11
TR PCB 0
TR PCB 1
TR PCB 2
TR PCB 3
See Figure 13-16
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-3
HD11 Service Manual
Page 319
Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Rear Upper I/O Panel)
Rear I/O panel connector
names and locations
See Figure 11-12
Video I/O PCB
See Figure 13-17
I/O panel
faceplate
Compatibility
Information
Rear upper
I/O box
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 320
PC PCBs
Motherboard PCB
J5B1
J3J1 PWR
Channel A DIMM0
Fan
J2F1
CPU
FAN
Channel B DIMM0
Figure 13-4
J6J1 SEC IDE
J6J2 PR1 IDE
AGP Slot
PCI Slot 1
CMOS Battery
PCI Slot 2
PCI Slot 3
PCI Slot 4
PCI Slot 5
Compatibility
Information
J9F1 USB
J9H1
USB
J9J1
PCI Slot 6
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 321
Graphics PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-6
HD11 Service Manual
Page 322
TVIEW Gold Video Converter PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-7
HD11 Service Manual
Page 323
Serial Interface Card
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-8
HD11 Service Manual
Page 324
Hauppauge Video Capture PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-9
HD11 Service Manual
Page 325
E-box Interface PCB
DIP switch, See Figure 13-19
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-10
HD11 Service Manual
Page 326
Sound Card
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-1
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 327
E-Box PCBs
Figure 13-11
Backplane PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-12
HD11 Service Manual
Page 328
Signal Distribution PCB, Front (Connector Module Side)
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-13
HD11 Service Manual
Page 329
Signal Distribution PCB, Back (E-box Side)
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-14
HD11 Service Manual
Page 330
Signal Processor PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 331
Galil Motion Control (3D Motor Controller) PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-16
HD11 Service Manual
Page 332
Transmit and Receive (TR0, TR1, TR2, and TR3) PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 333
Rear I/O Panel
PCB
Figure 13-17
Video I/O PCB
Internal side
of PCB
External side
of PCB
Compatibility
Information
Figure 13-3
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Control Panel
PCB
Figure 13-18
Control Panel PCB
Circuit side
Compatibility
Information
Page 334
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 335
Configuration: E-box Interface Board Settings
E-box
Interface
Board
Settings
HD11 system will not work properly unless E-box Interface Board DIP switch settings are as
shown in Figure 13-19.
Figure 13-19
E-box Interface Board DIP Switch Location and Settings
J501
U500
J401
J503
U501
S500
1
2
3
4
J404
Physio trigger cable connector
DIP switch
Figure 13-9
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 336
Configuration: Disk Drive Settings
Disk Drive
Settings
The jumper positions and switch settings of the drives in the HD11 depend on the manufacturer
of the drives.
Hard Disk Drive
Jumpers
Figure 13-20 shows typical hard disk drive jumper positions. Examine the drive itself for information on the correct settings. The hard disk drive is the only device on the primary IDE, and is
usually set to MASTER or SINGLE.
Figure 13-20
Hard Disk Drive Jumper Settings
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 337
Configuration: Disk Drive Settings
CD Drive
Jumpers
Figure 13-21 shows typical CD-RW drive jumper positions. Set the jumper to the MASTER position on the secondary IDE.
Figure 13-21
CD-RW Drive Jumper Position
MOD Drive
Jumpers
Set the MOD drive jumpers to SLAVE on the secondary IDE.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 338
Configuration: BIOS Settings
BIOS Settings
See “Viewing and Adjusting BIOS Settings” on page 339.
Table 13-2
Default BIOS Setting Exceptions
Parameter
Setting
BIOS Rev:
BIOS Configuration:
Splash Screen
Boot, Boot Device Priority, 1st Boot Device
BF86510A.0058.P19 or later
Set to "Default" except as listed below
Custom Philips screen - Flash from Philips supplied
file
Set to current time and date. (Time zone comes
from disk image).
Yes
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
CD drive
Boot, Boot Device Priority, 2nd Boot Device
Hard Disk Drive
Boot, Boot Device Priority, 3rd Boot Device
Power, After Power Failure
Disabled
Real Time Clock
Advanced, Boot Configuration, Plug & Play O/S
Advanced, Peripheral Configuration, Parallel Port
Advanced, Floppy Configuration, Floppy A
Boot, USB Boot
Stay Off
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Viewing and
Adjusting BIOS
Settings
Page 339
Use the information in this section to view the BIOS settings (Table 13-2). You will need to verify
and possibly restore the BIOS, after changing the CMOS battery or Motherboard (Figure 13-4).
The system boot-up sequence is dictated by the corresponding BIOS setting, which can be
changed if necessary.
Restoring the BIOS Settings to Default Values
➤ To view (and restore) the BIOS settings
2. As the system boots up, press Report repeatedly, until the BIOS screen opens.
3. View the BIOS settings, comparing them to the factory default exceptions listed in
Table 13-2.
4. Reset the BIOS to the default settings by pressing the Option 1 key and in the box that
appears, selecting Yes, and then pressing Return.
5. Set the system date and time to the local time by pressing the down arrow key until System
Time is highlighted. Refer to the descriptions in the right pane to make the appropriate
changes.
6. Press the right arrow until Advanced is highlighted, press the down arrow until Boot
Configuration is highlighted, press Return, and then set Plug and Play = Yes.
7. Press THI to return to the Advanced menu.
8. Press the down arrow until Peripheral Configuration is highlighted and press Return.
9. Refer to the descriptions in the right pane to set the following:
NOTE The Enter key that is referred to in the right pane is the Return key on the system
QWERTY keyboard.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
-
Serial Port A = Enabled
-
Serial Port B = Enabled
-
Parallel Port = Disabled
-
Legacy USB Support = Enabled
Page 340
10. Press THI to return to the Advanced menu, press the right arrow until Boot is highlighted,
and then press Return.
11. Under the Boot menu, set: USB Boot = Disabled.
12. Press the down arrow until Boot Device Priority is highlighted and then press Return.
13. Refer to the descriptions in the right pane to set the following:
-
First Boot Device = CD Drive
-
Second Boot Device = Hard Disk Drive
-
Third Boot Device = Disabled
-
Fourth Boot Device = Disabled
14. Press THI to return to the Boot menu, press the left arrow until Power is highlighted.
15. Press the down arrow until After Power Failure is highlighted.
16. Refer to the descriptions in the right pane to set it to Stay Off.
17. Press the Option 2 key, highlight Yes, and then press Enter to save the BIOS setting.
The system reboots.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 341
Changing the Boot Sequence
You can change the device from which the system boots either:
•
Permanently, so all subsequent system start-ups use the boot sequence
•
Temporarily, to change the sequence for the current start-up.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 342
Configuration: Peripheral Settings
Changing the Boot Sequence Temporarily
➤ To change the boot sequence temporarily
1. Adjust the VGA display height to show the whole screen. See “To adjust the VGA vertical
size” on page 165.
3. As the system boots up, press the Mic key repeatedly, until the Please Select Boot
Device screen opens.
4. Use the arrow keys to select the drive to boot from:
-
Select "4M-Sony CD-RW CRX225E” as your 1st Boot Device
-
Select "Hardrive" as your 2nd Boot Device.
5. Press Return.
Peripheral
Settings
The initial Philips-recommended peripheral settings for use with the HD11 system are provided
in this section (“B&W Printer” on page 343, “Color Printer” on page 343, and “VCR” on page
343).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
B&W Printer
HD11 Service Manual
Page 343
The Sony UP-D895MD has DIP switches on the back of the printer. The Philips-recommended
DIP switch settings for use with the HD11 system are given in Table 13-3.
Table 13-3
UP-D895MD B&W Printer Settings
Rear of Printer
DIP Switches 1–5
DIP Switch 6
DIP Switches 7–12
Down
Up
Down
Color Printer
There are no field-accessible settings on the UP-D23MD that FSEs need to access. The only difference between the UP-D23MD and the UP-D21MD used on the EnVisor is that the
UP-D23MD supports “high-speed” USB 2.0. The settings in the supporting drivers for these
printers are the same.
VCR
The VCR has front/rear panel switches, interface adapter PCB switch settings, displayed menu
settings, and hidden menu settings. Mitsubishi HS-MD3000U/E VCR settings for use with the
HD11 are given in Table 13-4, Table 13-5, and Table 13-6.
The RS-232 interface adapter is installed inside the VCR rear panel (Figure 13-22 and
Figure 13-23). Switches on the interface adapter must be set correctly for proper operation.
NOTE All switches and internal menus settings should be set properly at the factory on VCRs
shipped with new systems. However, when a replacement VCR is ordered, you will
need to check the switch settings and menu settings
To check or reset the switches, remove the two screws securing the adapter, remove the
adapter, and verify that the switches are set as indicated in Table 13-4.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 344
The displayed menu settings are listed in Table 13-5. To verify or reset these settings, see “To
change the VCR displayed menu settings” on page 350. Enter the numerical code from
Table 13-5 to enter the settings listed. (Only the numerical code that corresponds to setting is
displayed. You will not see the setting titles.)
The hidden menu settings are listed in Table 13-6. To verify or reset these settings, see “To
change the VCR hidden menu settings” on page 351.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 13-4
Parameter
Page 345
HS-MD3000U/E VCR Control and Switch Settings for the
HD11 System
NTSC Setting
(MD3000U)
PAL Setting
(MD3000E)
MIX
HIFI
OFF
MIX
HIFI
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Front Panel Controls
Monitor
Audio
Keylock
Rear Panel Controls
75 Ohm Video
75 Ohm S-Video
RS-232 Interface Adapter Switches
Cable Switch
DIP Switches 1–5
DIP Switch 6
DIP Switch 7
DIP Switch 8
Straight (P)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Straight (P)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-22
HD11 Service Manual
Page 346
HS-MD3000U/E VCR RS-232 Interface Adapter (1 of 2)
Rear view of Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 VCR
RS-232 Interface Adapter (Figure 13-23)
RESET
Remove screws
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 13-23
HD11 Service Manual
Page 347
HS-MD3000U/E VCR RS-232 Interface Adapter (2 of 2)
DIP switch assembly SW5001 (Shown with
Battery PCB removed for access. With the
PCB installed, you can access the switches
by using a large straightened paper clip.)
Cable slide switch SW5002
(shown in the “STRAIGHT P” position)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 13-5
Parameter
Page 348
HS-MD3000U/E VCR Displayed Menu Settings
for the HD11 System
NTSC Setting
PAL Setting
Numeric Code
(Not Displayed) (Not Displayed) (Displayed)
Menu 1
Rec Tape End
Tape End
Tape In
Tape Length
VISS
Time Code Rec.
Time Code Disp
Foot Switch
Dimmer
Stop
Stop
Stop
T-120
REC
OFF
OFF
L.E.
OFF
Stop
Stop
Stop
E-180
REC
OFF
OFF
L.E.
OFF
101:00
102:00
103:00
104:00
105:01
106:00
107:00
108:00
109:00
S-VHS/S-ET
ON/OFF
Auto
201:01
Y-NR
C-NR
Y-Enhancer
TBC
Color Filter
Freeze Mode
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frame
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frame
202:01
203:01
204:01
205:01
206:00
207:00
Menu 2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 13-5
Hi-Fi Audio
Normal Audio In
Page 349
HS-MD3000U/E VCR Displayed Menu Settings
for the HD11 System (Continued)
ON
MIX
ON
MIX
208:01
209:00
OFF (No time/
date set)
01
01
301:00
Month
Day
OFF (No time/date
set)
01
01
Do not set
Do not set
Year
Time
2004
00:00:00
2004
00:00:00
Do not set
Do not set
Language Menu2
Language
English (displayed) English (displayed) 001:00
Menu 31
Daylight Savings
1. VCRs are shipped with the Menu 3 (“clock”) functions left at the factory defaults shown because the
system also provides these functions and the VCR clock is not likely to be used. If the VCR clock is
set, it will cause the normal (standby) display of the VCR to display the time of day rather than tape
location time, which may be confusing to some users. Pressing RESET (Figure 13-22) restores these
settings to the factory defaults shown, but also resets the Language setting (see 2).
2. VCRs are shipped with the Language set to English. If you want to change the Language setting, press
RESET (Figure 13-22) and cycle through the languages displayed on the VCR display. Remember,
pressing RESET also restores the VCR clock settings to the factory defaults (see 1).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 350
➤ To change the VCR displayed menu settings
1. Power up the VCR.
2. Press and hold Menu for at least 2 seconds to initiate the VCR display.
3. Select items with JOG/ADJUST. Refer to Table 13-5 for displayed menu settings.
4. Select settings with FRAME/FIELD ENTER.
5. Change the settings with JOG/ADJUST.
6. Exit and save changes by pressing MENU.
NOTE No items are displayed on the system monitor when this menu is invoked.
Table 13-6
Mitsubishi HS-MD3000E/U VCR Hidden Menu Settings
for the HD11 System
Setting/Item
Picture Control (Sharpness)
(Head) Switching Point
Position Up/Down
Position Left/right
Chroma Amplitude
Hue (Color Phase)
Color Delay
Display
PC
SP
Ud
Lr
CA
CP
Cd
bC
CC
bd
NTSC Setting PAL Setting
0
65
0
0
2
0
2
–1
1
ON
0
65
0
0
2
0
2
–1
1
ON
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 351
➤ To change the VCR hidden menu settings
1. Power up the VCR.
2. Press and hold Stop and Play simultaneously for at least 10 seconds to initiate the VCR display item corresponding to the functions.
3. Select settings with FRAME/FIELD ENTER. Refer to Table 13-6 for hidden menu settings.
4. Change the settings with JOG/ADJUST.
5. Exit and save changes by pressing STOP
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
14
HD11 Service Manual
Page 352
Parts: Introduction
Parts
Introduction
This section contains general and specific parts information for the HD11 Ultrasound System.
How and
Where to Find
a Part
Number
In this manual, system field-replaceable parts and cables are shown in illustrations and are listed
in tables.
Use the parts and cable illustrations to visually locate and identify the part you are looking for.
The part number is included in the figure and is linked to the corresponding parts table where a
part description is provided.
Or, to find a part number by its description, look in the parts tables Table 14-1, which are alphabetized by the part descriptions.
Parts Locator Map
Go to the “HD11 Ultrasound System Parts Locator Map” Figure 14-1 to start your search or
one of the other applicable parts information links as follows:
•
Call your Philips representative for the core information you need to determine the compatibility of primary system PCBs and certain hardware assemblies with respect to the system
software releases.
•
For signal interconnect cable part numbers, see Figure 11-1 and Table 11-1.
•
For power distribution cable part numbers, see Figure 11-2 and Table 11-2.
•
For transducer part numbers, see Section 15, “Transducer Information”.
•
For accessories and options part numbers, see Table 14-2.
•
For peripheral part numbers and applicable cables, see Table 14-3.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 353
Parts: How and Where to Find a Part Number
Figure Conventions
1, 2, 3, etc
See Figure 14-X
Item Number The item number for each part or subassembly shown in an illustration is a
hypertext cross-reference linking to the parts/cable tables containing parts descriptions and additional information.
See Figure “See Figure” is a hypertext cross-reference link to a detail (subassembly) figure. In
the subassembly figure you will find either the part number, a reference to another detail figure,
or a reference to the table containing parts descriptions and additional information.
SYSTEM VIEW
System View Illustration Label The “SYSTEM VIEW” (System Parts Locator Map),
Figure 14-1 contains links to “PARENT VIEW” illustrations.
PARENT VIEW
Parent View Illustration Label “PARENT VIEW” indicates an illustration that provides links
to additional parts breakdown, indicated with a “See Figure” reference.
System View
System View Button The “System View” button is a hypertext cross-reference link to the
“SYSTEM VIEW” (System Parts Locator Map). You can return to the “SYSTEM VIEW” (System
Parts Locator Map) by clicking the “System View” button in the lower left corner of any figure in
this section.
Parent View
Parent View Button The “Parent View” button is a hypertext link to the parent-part or
“PARENT VIEW” illustration.
Parts List
Parts List Button The “Parts List” button (located on the “System Parts Locator Map” only)
is a hypertext cross-reference linking to the “Parts Table” containing parts descriptions and additional information. The “Parts List” can also be accessed by clicking one of the blue part numbers
in any of the figures in this section.
Installation
Installation Button The “Installation” button is a hypertext link to a figure’s corresponding
installation/removal procedure.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Disassembly
HD11 Service Manual
Page 354
Parts: How and Where to Find a Part Number
Disassembly Button The “Disassembly” button is a hypertext link to figures corresponding
to a disassembly/assembly procedure.
Green Arrow The green arrows found throughout the parts illustrations are used to indicate
movement (direction, rotation), or point to a specific area (details, breakdowns).
Parts Table Definitions
Item No. This column lists the item numbers that correspond to parts in the parts illustrations.
Located On This column lists all of the figures on which the part is found.
Legacy Part Number This column lists the legacy part number for an item. Use this column
only if you are in North America or Canada, or you order directly from Bothell. These numbers
correspond to the PR1 SAP system. If a table is referenced in this column, the part number is on
that table.
12NC Part Number This column lists the 12NC part number for an item. Use this column if
you are ordering from an APEC, an EMEA, or an LATAM country. 12NC numbers can be used
for parts orders worldwide. These numbers correspond to the MIP SAP system used by the SLIs
and Miami. If a table is referenced in this column, the part number is on that table.
Part Description The name or common description of the item is listed here. Where appropriate, the description column also includes size, tolerance, type or model, and material data for
the part. Parts tables are alphabetized by this column.
Attaching parts must be ordered separately. They are not provided with the assembly, the subassembly, or the component being attached.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 355
Parts: Parts Ordering Information
Notes/Reference Manufacturer’s part numbers, sometimes alternate part numbers, special
applications, and other information pertaining to a specific part are listed in the Notes/Reference
column. For top assemblies containing many replaceable parts, the applicable figure or table for
further breakdown of parts is listed here.
Parts
Ordering
Information
Field Service Engineers
For parts ordering procedures, FSEs should refer to their standard operating procedures.
Customers
Customers can order parts through an FSE or directly from the Customer Service Order Processing Department. Customers ordering parts through an FSE will need to provide the following information:
•
Shipping address
•
Purchase order number of equipment
•
Part numbers or sales order numbers
•
Part descriptions and quantity needed
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 356
Parts: Illustrations
Illustrations
Figure 14-1
HD11 Ultrasound System Parts Locator Map (Front and Rear Views)
SYSTEM VIEW
System labeling
Side, Figure 14-30
Video monitor
See Figure 14-3
Control panel
See Figure 14-6
Foot switch
See Figure 14-29
B&W printer bay
See Figure 14-26
PC assembly
See Figure 14-14
Rear I/O panel
See Figure 14-20
System enclosures
See Figure 14-11
E-box assembly
See Figure 14-17
Power supply
See Figure 14-19
Cart (internal)
See Figure 14-13
Parts List
Cart base enclosures
See Figure 14-12
- Front -
- Rear -
Side View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-2
Page 357
HD11Ultrasound System Parts Locator Map (Right Side)
SYSTEM VIEW
System labeling
Side, Figure 14-30
Front,
Rear
Lift column
See Figure 14-24
Peripheral top deck
See Figure 14-26
System enclosures
See Figure 14-11
Casters
See Figure 14-28
Parts List
- Right side -
End Views
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-3
Page 358
Video Monitor Assembly
PARENT VIEW
Internal microphone
32
93
Installation
Cable/connector
access panel
See Figure 14-5
Monitor base
See Figure 14-4
Disassembly
System View
54 Video monitor assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-4
HD11 Service Manual
Page 359
Video Monitor Base
Twivel shoe
97
96
Twivel ring
Parent View
System View
Monitor base
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 360
Cable/Connector Access Panel (Video Monitor)
Access panel
21
35
Parent View
System View
13
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-6
Page 361
Control Panel
PARENT VIEW
Knobs, transducer holders, and cable hooks
See Figure 14-7
Keyboard and trackball
See Figure 14-8
Monitor base
See Figure 14-4
Trigger and Mechlok cable
See Figure 14-10
Soft key assembly
See Figure 14-9
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-7
HD11 Service Manual
Page 362
Control Panel (Knobs, Transducer Holders, and Cable Hooks)
41
36
81 (2 plcs)
39
40
37
81 (2 plcs)
10 (4 plcs)
83 (8 plcs)
Parent View
System View
9 (2 plcs)
83 (4 plcs)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-8
HD11 Service Manual
Page 363
Control Panel (Keyboard and Trackball)
38
Trackball
Disassembly
43
Parent View
System View
85
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-9
HD11 Service Manual
Page 364
Control Panel (Soft key Assembly)
PCB
80 (11 plcs)
1
Disassembly
5
Parent View
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-10
Page 365
Control Panel (Trigger and Mechlok Cable)
33
6
34
Pivot Latch
Parent View
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-11
Page 366
System Enclosures
PARENT VIEW
85 (4 plcs)
81 (2 plcs)
82 (2 plcs)
35
60
8
7
62
82 (2 plcs)
Disassembly
System View
59
58
81 (6 plcs)
Cart base enclosures
See Figure 14-12
61
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-12
Page 367
Cart Base Enclosures
84 (2 plcs)
88
89
84 (4 plcs)
Disassembly
13
Parent View
System View
89
84 (2 plcs)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-13
Page 368
Cart (Internal)
PARENT VIEW
Lift column
See Figure 14-24
Modem
See Figure 14-22
Rear I/O panel
See Figure 14-20
PC assembly
See Figure 14-14
E-box assembly
See Figure 14-17
Power supply
See Figure 14-19
PC and E-box air cooling fans
See Figure 14-23
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-14
HD11 Service Manual
Page 369
PC Assembly
PC access panel
See Figure 14-15
See Table 14-2 for drive configuration kits
22
53
24
Disassembly
Parent View
56
System View
57
Hard disk drive light panel
76 PC assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 370
PC Access Panel
See Figure 13-1 for pcb locations
77
23 (2 plcs)
Disassembly
Parent View
System View
PC components
See Figure 14-16
Access panel
Part of 76
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-16
Page 371
PC Components
46
47
22
16
53
66
64
69
67
65
63
68
Parent View
System View
24
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-17
HD11 Service Manual
Page 372
E-box Assembly
E-box access panel
See Figure 14-18
72
71 (behind)
50
3
51
52
4
2
Disassembly
79 (8 plcs)
Parent View
System View
See Table 14-2 for module
configuration kits
49
25 E-box assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-18
HD11 Service Manual
Page 373
E-box Access Panel
73
70
74 (4 plcs)
20
14
Disassembly
Parent View
System View
Power supply
See Figure 14-19
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-19
HD11 Service Manual
Page 374
Power Supply (Below E-box)
78
Retainer clip
28
Power cord
Installation
Power supply
Disassembly
Parent View
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-20
HD11 Service Manual
Page 375
Rear I/O Panel
Upper I/O panel
75
17
USB
Disassembly
Rear vent
Parent View
System View
Faceplate
Lower I/O bulkhead
See Figure 14-21
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-21
HD11 Service Manual
Page 376
Lower I/O Bulkhead
Modem
See Figure 14-22
Lower I/O bulkhead
19
83
Rear vent
Parent View
System View
18
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-22
Page 377
Modem (V.90, Portable USB)
USB connection
94
95
90
RJ-45 connection
Disassembly
Parent View
System View
45 Modem assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-23
HD11 Service Manual
Page 378
PC and E-box Air Cooling Fan Assemblies
PC side
E-box side
26
Fans
Disassembly
- Front of system -
Parent View
27
System View
Fan filter
Disassembly
28
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-24
HD11 Service Manual
Lift Column
Mechlok assembly
and gas strut
See Figure 14-25
Parent View
System View
Page 379
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-25
HD11 Service Manual
Page 380
Lift Column (Mechlok Assembly and Gas Strut)
92
6
Pivot mount (reference)
Disassembly
Parent View
System View
44
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Figure 14-26
Page 381
B&W Printer Bay, Drawer, and Peripheral Top Deck
PARENT VIEW
Peripheral mounting
plates and enclosures
See Figure 14-27
62
91
1
Or
Disassembly
System View
21
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-27
HD11 Service Manual
Page 382
Peripheral Mounting Plates and Enclosures
91
81 (4 plcs)
5
86
81 (4 plcs)
9
Single peripheral
55
Or
Installation
Dual peripherals
84 (4 plcs)
Installation
Disassembly
29
30
35
87
Parent View
System View
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-28
HD11 Service Manual
Page 383
System Casters
15
Rear caster
14
Disassembly
System View
Front caster
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-29
System View
HD11 Service Manual
Page 384
Foot Switch Assembly
16 Foot switch assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-30
HD11 Service Manual
Page 385
System Labeling (Left Side of System)
42
PC assembly
System View
- Left side -
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Figure 14-31
HD11 Service Manual
Page 386
HD11 System Accessory Box Contents
10
15
28
16
17
4
System View
14
6
9
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Parts Table
Part Numbers
Page 387
Parts: Parts Table Part Numbers
Included in the tables that follow are two columns of part numbers. Some parts have numbers
listed in both columns. This is required due to varying SAP clients located in various geographical
locations. If there is only one number on the line item you are looking for, then that is the number you use. Refer to Parts Table Definitions for Legacy/12NC part number information.
Parts List
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
HD11 Ultrasound System Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
1
Figure 14-9
4535611726211
Backing, Soft key
Control panel Soft key
assembly
2
Figure 14-17
4535634944811
Bezel CW
3
Figure 14-17
4535634944611
Bezel, Honda, Convex
4
Figure 14-17
4535634944711
Bezel, Perfect Union
5
Figure 14-9
453561153391
Bezel, Soft key
Used for the Non-imaging
module (E-box
453561194871)
Used for the cartridge
connector module
453561194861
See Table 14-2 for option
kits
Used for the Explora
module 453561194851
Control panel Soft key
assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
6
7
8
Located
On
Page 388
Parts: Parts List
HD11 Ultrasound System Parts List (Continued)
Legacy
Part Number
Figure 14-10 M2540-80035
Figure 14-25
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-11
9
Figure 14-7
Figure 14-27
10
Figure 14-7
11
12
13
14
Figure 11-2 Table 11-2
Figure 11-1 Table 11-1
Figure 14-12
Figure 14-28
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
453563470981
Cable Assy, Mechlok
453561153381
453563494491
453561168711
M2540-40690
453563470421
Table 11-2
Table 11-1
453563497281
453561179591
Notes/Reference
Mechanical cable used on
the Mechlok assy
Cable Hook, Front
Transducer cord hanger
Cable Hook, Rear
Power cord hanger
Used for small peripheral
shelf or non peripheral
installation
Cable Hook, Transducer (B) Used for control panel
tranducer cables or as a
power cord hanger for
large peripheral shelf
installation
Also used as part of config
kit 989605346371
Cable Hook, Transducer,
Control panel
Mushroom (A)
Cables, Power Distribution
Cables, Signal Interconnect
Cart, HD11
HD11 chassis assembly
Caster, Swivel and Total
Front caster (2)
Locking
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 389
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Notes/Reference
Caster, Swivel, Plain
Central Processing Unit
(CPU)
Connector, Phone Jack,
Coupler, 6C
Connector, SGL, Cont Pin,
6-mm-BSC-SZ, Rnd
Connector, Tel Plug, Phone
1, CKT
Door Assembly, E-box
Rear caster (2)
PC assembly, motherboard
Drawer Assembly
Used if no B&W printer is
installed
PC assembly
15
16
Figure 14-28
Figure 14-16 M2540-671411
17
Figure 14-20
18
Figure 14-21 1251-59641
19
Figure 14-21 1252-6152
20
Figure 14-18
21
Figure 14-26
22
Figure 14-14
Figure 14-16
453561197991
Drive, CDRW/DVD-ROM,
White Grey
23
Figure 14-15 M2540-67100
453561121491
Drive, Disk, Hard, 80GB,
7200 RPM,
24
25
Figure 14-14 M2540-801051
Figure 14-16
Figure 14-17
453561179601
No part number
as of 12/9/04
453561179161
Part Description
No part number
as of 12/9/04
453563470041
4535634945211
453561180661
No part number
as of 12/9/04
4535634945111
ATA 100
Drive, Disk,
Magneto-optical, 3.5-in
E-box assembly
Rear I/O panel
Used on the lower rear
I/O bulkhead
Used on the lower rear
I/O bulkhead
Card cage access door
PC assembly (2)
Legacy Number
2100-1953-01
kits
HD11 E-box assembly
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 390
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Dual fans
Single fan
Filter slides out on either
side of the system
Color printer enclosure
snaps onto shelves
453561180351 or
453561180361
VCR enclosure snaps onto
shelves 453561180351 or
453561180361
kits
26
27
28
Figure 14-23
Figure 14-23
Figure 14-23
453561154671
453561154661
453561167121
Fan Assembly, E-box
Fan Assembly, PC
Filter Assembly
29
Figure 14-27
453561170561
Garage, Color Printer
(Small)
30
Figure 14-27
453561170571
Garage, VCR (Large)
31
Not shown
No part number
as of 12/9/04
32
Figure 14-3
4535634957511
Gasket, EMI, Nylon,
Urethane, NIPL,
3.8mm-Wide
Grill, Speaker
33
34
Figure 14-10
Figure 14-10
453563495691
453563495721
Handle, Front
Handle, Height Release
8160-16031
Attaches to front monitor
mount
Part of control panel
Trigger for control panel
adjustment
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 391
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
No OEM option/blanking
panel
(Removed for peripheral
shelf installation)
35
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-27
4535611559711
Hatch, Top
36
37
38
39
Figure 14-7
Figure 14-7
Figure 14-8
Figure 14-7
453563495671
453561155531
453563495541
453561177181
Holder, Transducer, Left
Holder, Transducer, Right
Keyboard, HD11
Knob, LGC
40
Figure 14-7
453561160161
41
Figure 14-7
42
Figure 14-30
4535611605211
43
Figure 14-8
44
45
Figure 14-25 M2540-80030
Figure 14-22 2100-1926-011
4535611728911
453563470971
No part number
as of 12/9/04
46
Figure 14-16 M2540-671801
1065-6462-01
453561129211
No part number
as of 12/9/04
Includes Soft key board
Control panel LGC slide
knob (2 plcs)
Knob, Light Pipe, TGC/LGC Control panel TGC slide
knob (8 plcs)
Knob, Small, Push Rotate
Control panel rotary knob
(5 plcs)
Label, Software, License,
PC label
Windows XP Embedded
LED Assembly
Control panel
Mechlok Assembly
Lift column
Modem, V.90, Portable, USB See Figure 11-1 for
modem cabling
Module, 256 MB Memory
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
47
Figure 14-16 M2540-671901
48
Not shown
49
Figure 14-17 M2540-007601
No part number
as of 12/9/04
50
Figure 14-17
453561194861
51
Figure 14-17
Page 392
Parts: Parts List
No part number
as of 12/9/04
453561196291
453561194851
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Module, 512 MB Memory
Module, DDR, IC, 64Mx64,
200MHz, Dimm184
(512MB)
Module Case, Blanking
E-box assembly
No module option/
blanking cover
kits
Module, Cartridge
E-box cart configurable
Connector Assy
transducer module
Use Honda bezel
4535634944611
Module, Explora Connector E-box cart configurable
Assy
transducer module
Use Perfect Union bezel
4535634944711
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
52
Located
On
Figure 14-17
Page 393
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
453561194871
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Module, Non-imaging
Doppler Connector Assy
(CW/Pencil probe)
E-box cart configurable
transducer module
Use CW bezel
4535634944811
NOTE HD11 does not
support two pencil probes
plugged in simultaneously.
53
Figure 14-14
Figure 14-16
453561182811
Module, Physio (ECG)
54
Figure 14-3
453561166991
Monitor, 6 Mode, RGB
55
Figure 14-27
4535611803711
Mount, Shelf
PC assembly
kits
Multi-sync 15-in video
monitor
Peripheral shelf mounting
bracket
Part of config kit
989605346371
(Replaces top hatch
453561155971)
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 394
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Panel, Drive Blank Off
Notes/Reference
56
Figure 14-14
453561153581
57
Figure 14-14
453561153591
58
59
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-11
453563494431
453563494451
60
61
62
453563494411
453563494401
453563494441
63
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-26
Figure 14-16
PC assembly
No drive option/blanking
cover
Panel, Drive Blank Off, Small PC assembly
No drive option/blanking
cover
Panel, Front
Panel, Front, Storage Bin
PC assembly
Mounts on storage bin box
Panel, Side, Left
Panel, Side, Right
Panel, Top, Cart
OEM deck
453561183001
PCB Assy, E-box Interface
64
Figure 14-16
453561198941
PCB Assy, PCA Graphics
Card, 64MB, Celestica
PC assembly
See Figure 13-1 for PCB
locations
PC assembly
locations
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 395
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
65
Figure 14-16
453561194831
66
Figure 14-16 M2540-671101
4535611943211
67
Figure 14-16
453561194361
68
Figure 14-16
453561180551
69
Figure 14-16
453561194841
70
Figure 14-18
453563499311
Part Description
Notes/Reference
PCB Assy, PCA, Hauppauge PC assembly
Video Capture
locations
PCB Assy, PC Motherboard PC assembly
locations
PCB Assy, PCA, PCI, SGL
PC assembly
Serial Port
locations
PCB Assy, Sound Card,
PC assembly
Creative CT4751
locations
PCB Assy, PCA, TVIEW
PC assembly
Video Converter
locations
PCB Assy, 3D Motor
E-box assembly
Controller
kits
(Galil Motion Control)
locations
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 396
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
E-box assembly
locations
E-box assembly
locations
E-box assembly
locations
E-box assembly
4 boards required, TR0,
TR1, TR2, TR3
locations
Rear I/O panel
HD11 PC assembly
71
Figure 14-17 M2540-60210
453561125671
PCB Assy, Backplane Board
72
Figure 14-17 M2540-60220
453561125661
PCB Assy, Signal
Distribution Board
73
Figure 14-18 M2540-60260
453561125621
PCB Assy, Signal Processor
Board
74
Figure 14-18 M2540-60240
453561125641
PCB Assy, Transmit and
Receive (TR) Board
75
76
453561125681
453561152641
77
Figure 14-20 M2540-60190
Figure 14-14
Figure 14-15
Figure 14-15
453561194311
78
Figure 14-19
453561161891
PCB Assy, Video I/O Board
PC, Display Processor,
HD11 SCD
Power Supply, PC, Switching, Top rear of PC assembly
6 Output, 300W
Power Supply, Universal DC Bottom of E-box assembly
and AC, HD11
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 397
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
453561188621
Screw, M3-,5x8, Pnh, Torx,
with CCC Washer, Pas
Used on the Signal
Distribution and Backplane
boards
No part number
as of 12/9/04
453561125331
Screw, M3x0.5, 6mm-Long,
Machine
Screw, M4-0.7x10, Sems,
Torx, Dr, Pan, Ss, Pas
79
Figure 14-17
80
Figure 14-9
81
Figure 14-7
Figure 14-11
Figure 14-27
82
Figure 14-11 0515-12691
No part number
as of 12/9/04
83
Figure 14-7 0515-28591
Figure 14-21
84
Figure 14-12 M2540-803201
Figure 14-27
No part number
as of 12/9/04
No part number
as of 12/9/04
85
Figure 14-8
Figure 14-11
0515-04301
453561184181
Common usage
throughout system
kits
There are two screws at
the rear of both side
panels.
Screw, M4x0.7, 10mm-Long, Used for the front and
Machine
rear cable hooks
Screw, M4x0.7, 10mm-Long,
Pnh, Machine
Screw, M4x0.7, 10mm-Long, Also used as part of config
w/Washer, Mushroom,
kit 989605346371
Machine
Screw, M4x30, Tx, Flh, Pas, Control panel screws
Ss, Patch
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
Page 398
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Dual peripheral shelf for
both color printer and
VCR
Part of config kit
989605346371
Use cable hook (2)
453561168711 for large
shelf installations
Single peripheral shelf for
either the color printer or
the VCR
Use rear cable hook
453563494491 for small
shelf installations
86
Figure 14-27
453561180351
Shelf, Long (Large)
87
Figure 14-27
453561180361
Shelf, Small
88
Figure 14-12
4535634957611
Skirt, Base, Rear
89
Figure 14-12
Skirt, Base, Side
Left or right replaceable
90
Figure 14-22 2601-0145-011
Sleeve, Ferrite
91
Figure 14-26 1065-2386-011
Figure 14-27
4535611533511
No part number
as of 12/9/04
No part number
as of 12/9/04
Used on the V.90 USB
modem cable
OEM deck
Two straps are used to
secure each peripheral
Strap, Universal OEM
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 14-1
Item
No.
Located
On
HD11 Service Manual
Page 399
Parts: Parts List
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
92
93
94
Figure 14-25
Figure 14-3
Figure 14-22 2210-01261
453561182341
453561153361
No part number
as of 12/9/04
95
Figure 14-22 2210-01251
No part number
as of 12/9/04
96
Figure 14-4
4535611570811
97
Figure 14-4
4535611766411
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Strut, Gas, 60-lbs
Used on the lift column
Support, Monitor, Front
Tape, Velcro, IW, Black, Type Used for mounting the
170
modem to the PC side of
Tape, Velcro, IW, Black, Type the upper I/O box
400
Trim, Twivel Base
Monitor mount/swivel/
pivot base
Twivel Hat
Monitor mount
1. Part number is not identified as a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 400
Parts: Accessories and Options Parts List
Accessories
and Options
Parts List
Table 14-2
Item
No.
Legacy
Part Number
HD11 Ultrasound System Accessories and Options Parts List
12NC
Part Number
1
989605346111
2
989605346281
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Configuration Kit, 4D
Hardware
Option Kit
Includes 3D Motor Controller PCB
453563499311
Configuration Kit, MO Drive Option Kit
Hardware
Includes Magneto-optical disk drive
3
989605346301
Configuration Kit, Physio
Module Hardware
4
989605346631
Configuration Kit, Blanking
Connector Panel
M2540-801051, and Magneto-optical
disk M2540-80101
Option Kit
Includes Physio Module 453561182811,
Physio USB cable assembly
453561153761, and Physio Trigger cable
assembly M2540-69030
Option Kit
Includes Honda bezel 4535634944611,
Blank module case M2540-007601,
Gasket 8160-16031, and Screw
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-2
Item
No.
Legacy
Part Number
5
Page 401
HD11 Ultrasound System Accessories and Options Parts List (Continued)
12NC
Part Number
989605346371
6
M1500A
989803103811
7
M1510A
989803103871
8
9
M1613A
M1603A
989803104451
989803104371
10
77921-62480
11
12
13
14
M1619A
M1609A
M2540-80101
40420A
No part number
as of 12/9/04
989803104481
989803104411
453563468731
989803101301
15
13951C
989803100491
Part Description
Notes/Reference
Configuration Kit, Long
Peripheral Shelf
Includes long shelf 453561180351, shelf
mount 4535611803711, cable hook
453561168711, screws M2540-803201
Included in the accessory box shipped
with the system, Figure 14-31
Cable, 3 Lead ECG Patient
Trunk, AAMI
Cable, 3 Lead ECG Patient
Trunk, IEC
Cable, 3 Lead Set, AAMI
Cable, 3 Lead Shield Gbr USA Included in the accessory box shipped
Cable Assy, Physio Cable Kit Included in the accessory box shipped
Cable, Lead Set, IEC
Cable, Lead Set, U.S.
Disk, Magneto-optical
Part of 989605346281 kit
Electrode, Disp Diag 1000/cs, Included in the accessory box shipped
Pre-gelled, Ss
Electrode, Neonatal/Pediatric
Solid Gel
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 14-2
Item
No.
16
Page 402
HD11 Ultrasound System Accessories and Options Parts List (Continued)
Legacy
Part Number
12NC
Part Number
Part Description
Notes/Reference
M2540-80280
453563471071
Foot switch Assembly
Illustration: Figure 14-29
17
SNY110HG
989803110101
18
SNY21L
453563486801
Paper, B&W, High Gloss
Thermal, UPP-110HG
Paper, Color, L-Size, Medical
Connects to the rear upper I/O panel
See Figure 11-12
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Page 403
Parts: Peripherals Parts List
Peripherals
Parts List
Table 14-3
Item
No.
Peripherals and Applicable Cables
Part Description
USA/Worldwide
Part Number
Power Cable
Signal Cable
1
Printer, Black-and-White,
UP-D895MD, Digital, USB, Sony
453561157291
453563198571
M2540-69100
2
Printer, Color, UP-D23MD, Sony
453561121361
453561179211
M2540-69100
3
VCR, HS-MD3000U, NTSC,
Mitsubishi, 120V, 60Hz
(VCR only)
453561166202
453561179211
3500-3596-01
M2540-69202
M2540-69204
4
(With RS-232/USB Adapter)
453561169651
453561179211
3500-3596-01
M2540-69202
M2540-69204
References
Photo
Figure 1-3
Cabling diagram
Figure 11-5
Parts Illustration
Figure 14-26
Legacy number
2100-1941-01
Photo
Figure 1-3
Cabling diagram
Figure 11-6
Photo
Figure 1-3
Cabling diagram
Figure 11-4
NTSC version
supports
NTSC-M format
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
Table 14-3
Item
No.
5
HD11 Service Manual
Page 404
Parts: Peripherals Parts List
Peripherals and Applicable Cables (Continued)
Part Description
VCR, HS-MD3000EA, PAL,
Mitsubishi
USA/Worldwide
Part Number
Power Cable
453561166212
453561179211
3500-3596-01
M2540-69202
M2540-69204
453561169661
453561179211
3500-3596-01
M2540-69202
M2540-69204
453561169671
--
--
100-230V, 50/60Hz
(VCR only)
6
(With RS-232/USB Adapter)
7
R-3002 RS-232/USB Adapter
Signal Cable
References
Photo
Figure 1-3
Cabling diagram
Figure 11-4
PAL version
supports PAL-B
format
Used on the
Mitsubishi VCR
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
15
HD11 Service Manual
Page 405
Transducer Information: Introduction
Transducer Information
Introduction
This section summarizes general and parts information for the transducers that can be used with
the HD11 system.
Table 15-1 through Table 15-6 lists the transducers by type, providing general information about
each:
•
Table 15-1 Curved Array Transducers
•
Table 15-2 Doppler Pencil Transducers
•
Table 15-3 Linear Array Transducers
•
Table 15-4 Sector Array Transducers
•
Table 15-5 Transesophageal (TEE) Transducers
•
Table 15-6 3D/4D Transducers
Table 15-7 lists the parts information for each transducer.
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-1
Page 406
Curved Array Transducers
Name/Connector
Applications
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
Harmonics
Capable?
C5-2
Abdominal, OB/GYN
2.0–5.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
Endovaginal, OB/GYN
4.0–8.0 MHz
Yes
No
Yes
No
Explora
Abdominal, Neonatal head, OB/ 5.0–8.0 MHz
GYN, Pediatric
C9-4
Abdominal, OB/GYN, Pediatric 4.0–9.0 MHz
Yes
No
Endocavity
Yes
No
Cartridge
C8-4v
Cartridge
C8-5
Explora
C9-5ec
Explora
5.0–9.0 MHz
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-2
Page 407
Doppler Pencil Transducers
Name /Connector
Applications
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
Harmonics
Capable?
D2cwc
Cardiac
2.0 MHz
No
No
Transcranial Doppler
2.0 MHz
No
No
Cardiac, Vascular
5.0 MHz
No
No
Pencil
D2tcd
Pencil
D5cwc
Pencil
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-3
Page 408
Linear Array Transducers
Name/Connector
Applications
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
L8-4
Abdominal, Musculoskeletal,
Pediatric Hips, Small Parts,
Vascular
Abdominal, Musculoskeletal,
Pediatric Hips, Small Parts,
Vascular
Abdominal, Pediatric Hips,
Small Parts, Vascular
4.0–8.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
3.0–12.0 MHz Yes
Yes
5.0–12.0 MHz Yes
No
Cardiac, Intraoperative,
Musculoskeletal, Vascular
7.0–15.0 MHz No
No
Explora
L12-3
Cartridge
L12-5
Explora
L15-7io
Explora
Harmonics
Capable?
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-4
Page 409
Sector Array Transducers
Harmonics
Capable?
Name/Connector
Applications
PA 4-21
Abdominal, Cardiac, OB/GYN, 2.0–4.0 MHz
TCD
Yes
Yes
Abdominal, Cardiac, TCD
1– 3.0 MHz
No
Yes
Abdominal, Cardiac, TCD,
OB/GYN
2.0–4.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
Cardiac, Neonatal head, OB/
GYN, Pediatric abdominal
3.0–8.0 MHz
No
No
Pediatric cardiac, Pediatric
abdominal, Intraoperative,
Neonatal head
4.0–12.0 MHz No
No
Cartridge
S3-1
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
Explora
S4-2
Cartridge
S8-3
Explora
S12-4
Explora
1. This transducer is not sold with the system, but is supported
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-5
Page 410
TEE Transducers
Name/Connector
Applications
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
S7-2omni
Transesophageal (Adult and
Pediatric cardiac)
2.0–7.0 MHz
No
Yes
Pediatric cardiac)
3.0–7.0 MHz
No
No
Pediatric cardiac)
4.6–6.0 MHz
No
Yes
Explora
S7-3t mini-Multi
Explora
T6H1
2
1. This transducer is not sold with the system, but is supported.
2. Requires an adapter for use on the HD11 system.
Harmonics
Capable?
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-6
Page 411
3D/4D Transducers
Name/Connector
Applications
Frequency
Biopsy
Capable?
Harmonics
Capable?
3D 6-2
Abdominal, OB/GYN, Pediatric
2.0–6.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
Abdominal, OB/GYN, Pediatric
4.0–8.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
Endovaginal, OB/GYN
3.0–9.0 MHz
Yes
Yes
Explora
3D 8-4
Explora
3D 9-3v
Explora
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-7
Transducer
Page 412
HD11 System Transducer Part Numbers
Legacy Part Number
12 NC Part Number
C5-21
--
453561173201
C8-4V1
C8-5
C9-4
C9-5ec
Doppler Pencil
D2cwc
D5cwc
D2tcd
Linear Array
L8-4
--
453561172921
-4000-0972-02
4000-0967-02
453561190821
453561116321
453561119881
-4000-0990-01
--
453561172792
453561128561
453561204991
---
453561167102
453561182101
--
453561189752
--
45356115331
21422-68000
453563474811
---
453561176631
453561182071
Curved Array
L12-31
L12-51
L15-7io
Sector Array
PA4-21
S3-1
S4-2
4535 612 10261
CSIP Level 1
HD11 Service Manual
Table 15-7
Page 413
HD11 System Transducer Part Numbers (Continued)
Transducer
Legacy Part Number
12 NC Part Number
S8-3
S12-4
Transesophageal (TEE)
T6H (legacy OmniPlane - 21378A)
T6H Adapter
S7-2omni
S7-3t
3D/4D
3D6-2
3D9-3v
3D8-4
---
453561181011
453561184501
21378-68000
----
453563466821
453561167281
453561181031
453561181211
-4000-0932-02
--
453561166061
453561125001
453561164181
1. Supplies and accessories, including transducer biopsy guides, kits, and covers or sheaths, are
available from CIVCO Medical Instruments. See “Supplies and Accessories” on page 42.

HD11 Service Manual

Transcription

Similar documents

- Included with Park Millennium Cable TV Package

Building Code Training – August 30th at Burgundy Basin Inn

Christmas Card order form15.pub - Little Sisters of the Poor Pittsburgh

GlASS FibER REiNFORcEd CONcREtE

European Network for Conflict Research (ENCoRe)

flyer! - Lm-therm Elektrotechnik AG

MA6900

Hovrn onconarons - Home Decorators Collection

MXCL-D0135-Maxcell Info Sheet.indd

StarMark - Star Building Systems